Horizon Hobby X378 X-378 7 Channel FM Radio System User Manual X378 Instruction Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	259485
Application ID	r7fSI2yaW3UK/7f064SKjA==
Document Description	X378 Instruction Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	269.26kB (3365723 bits)
Date Submitted	2002-07-29 00:00:00
Date Available	2002-09-03 00:00:00
Creation Date	2002-07-23 22:12:22
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Macintosh
Document Lastmod	2002-07-23 22:12:26
Document Title	X378 Instruction Manual

4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 1
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR AIRPLANE,
HELICOPTER
AND
SAILPLANE
X-378
7-CHANNEL COMPUTER
RADIO SYSTEM
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. INTRODUCTION
Table of Contents
1. Using The Manual
2. Features
2.1
Transmitter
2.2
Receiver
2.3
Servo Features
3. Componenet Specifications
3.1
System Specifications
3.2
Transmitter Specifications
3.3
Servo Specifications
3.4
Receiver Specifications
3.5
Charger Specifications
3.6
Airborne Battery Pack
4. Battery Charging
4.1
Transmitter/Receiver
4.2
Charger
4.3
Advanced Digital Trims
II. AIRPLANE SECTION
1. Software Funtions
1.1
Control Identification and Location
1.2 Channel Assignment/Throttle ALT
A. Airplane Version Transmitter
B. Sailplane Mode
C. Heli Mode
1.3
Transmitter Rear
1.4
Control Stick Length Adjustment
1.5
Control Stick Tension Adjustment
1.6
Direct Servo Control
1.7
Neck Strap Attachment
1.8
Base Loaded Antenna
1.9
Frequency Notes/Aircraft Only Frequencies
2. Connections
2.1
Installation Requirements
2.2
Connections
3. Mode Input an Function
4. Alarm and Error Display
4.1
Battery Alarm and Display
4.2
Backup Error Display
5. System Mode Function
5.1
Normal Display
5.2
Direct Access Digital Trims
5.3
System Mode
5.4
Model Selection/Copy Select
5.5
Model Name Entry
5.6
Model Type Selection
5.7
Data Reset
5.8
Modulation Select
5.9
Data Transfer
5.10 Trim Step
5.11 Throttle Cut Switch
5.12 Wing Type Selection
5.13 Aux 2/Spoiler Channel Input Select
6. Function Mode
6.2
Servo Reversing
6.3
Dual-Rates
6.4 Exponential
6.5 Sub Trim
10
10
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
33
35
38
6.6 Travel Adjust
6.7 Elevator-toFlap Mixing
6.8
Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing
6.9
Mode Function
6.10 Snap Roll Function
6.11 Differential Aileron Mixing
6.12 Landing Attitude
6.13 Programmable Mixing
6.14 Fail Safe/Hold
6.15 Trainer System
6.16 Timer Function
7. Practical Applications
7.1
Programmable Mixing Options
8. Data Sheet
39
40
42
44
46
48
50
51
55
59
62
64
64
65
III. HELICOPTER
1. Transmitter Controls
1.1
Control Identification and Location
A. Helicopter Version Transmitter
1.2
Channel Assignment/Receiver
1.3
Transmitter Rear
1.4
Control Stick Length Adjustment
1.5
Control Stick Tension Adjustment
1.6
DSC Cord
1.7
Neck Strap Attachment
1.8
Base Loaded Antenna
1.9
Frequency Notes/Aircraft Only Frequencies
2. Connections
2.1
Installation Requirements
2.2
Connections
3. Key Input and Display
4. Alarm and Error Display
4.1
Battery Alarm and Display
4.2
Backup Error Display
5. System Mode
5.1
Normal Display
5.2
System Mode
5.3
Function Mode
5.4
Model Selection/Model Copy Select
5.5
Model Name Entry
5.6
Model Type Selection
5.7
Data Rest
5.8
Modulation Select
5.9
Data Transfer
5.10 Trim Step
5.11 Throttle Cut Switch Activation
5.12 Aux/Gear Function Select
5.13 Swashplate Type
6. Function Mode
6.1
Function Mode
6.2
Servo Reversing
6.3
Dual-Rates
6.4 Exponential
6.5 Sub Trim
6.6 Travel Adjust
6.7 CCPM Swashplate Mixing
6.8
Throttle Hold
6.9
Throttle Curve
6.10 Pitch Curves
6.11 Inverted Switch
66
66
66
66
68
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
73
73
73
74
75
77
78
79
80
81
84
85
86
87
88
88
89
90
92
93
94
95
97
98
101
103
X-378 MANUAL Table of Contents
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.12 Revolution Mixing
6.13 Gyro Gain Function
6.14 Programmable Mixing
6.15 PCM Fail-Safe/Hold Function
6.16 Trainer System
6.17 Timer Function
7. Data Sheet
104
106
110
114
117
119
121
IV. SAILPLANE
1. Transmitter Controls
1.1
Control Identification and Location
A. Glider Version Tx
B. Airplane Mode
C. Heli Mode
1.2
Channel Assignment/Throttle ALT
1.3
Transmitter Rear
1.4
Control Stick Length Adjustment
1.5
Control Stick Tension Adjustment
1.6
DSC Cord
1.7
Neck Strap Adjustment
1.8
Base Loaded Antenna
1.9
Frequency Notes/Aircraft Only Frequencies
2. Connections
2.1
Installation Requirements
2.2
Connections
3. Key Input and Display
4. Alarm and Error Display
4.1
Battery Alarm and Display
4.2
Back-Up Error Display
5. System Mode
5.1
Normal Display
5.2
Model Setup Mode
5.3
Function Mode
5.4
Model Selection/Model Copy Select
5.5
Model Name Entry
5.6
Model Type Selection
5.7
Data Rest
5.8
Modulation Select
5.9
Data Transfer Function
5.10 Trim Step
5.11 V-Tail/Dual Flap Wing Mixing
5.12 Flap Switch Select Function
6. Function Mode
6.1
Function Mode
6.2
Servo Reversing
6.3
Dual Rates
6.4
Exponential
6.5
Sub Trim
6.6
Travel Adjust
6.7
Elevator-to-Flap Mixing
6.8
Aileron-to-Flap Mixing
6.9
Differential Aileron Mixing
6.10 Flap to Elevator Mixing
6.11 Flap-to-Aileron Mixing
6.12 Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing
6.13 Crow/Camber Mixing
6.14 Dual-Flap Trim
6.15 Programmable Mixing 1-6
6.16 Fail-Safe/Hold Function (PCM Only)
6.17 Trainer System
X-378 MANUAL Table of Contents
122
122
123
123
123
124
125
125
125
126
126
126
6.18 Timer Function
7. Practical Applications
7.1
X-378 Program
8. Data Sheets
177
179
179
184
V. IMPORTANT INFORMATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Servo Precautions
General Notes
Federal Aviation Administration
Daily Flight Checks
Frequency Chart
Warranty Information
185
185
186
186
187
188
127
127
128
128
128
128
128
128
129
130
131
133
134
135
136
137
140
141
143
144
145
146
148
149
150
151
153
155
156
159
162
164
166
167
171
175
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 4
CHAPTER 1: USING THIS MANUAL • Introduction
USING THIS MANUAL
In the beginning of this manual you will find the
specifications for the radio and its various
accessories. In addition, guidelines for the initial
installation of the accessories have been included,
as well as instructions for setting all the functions
and programs of the X-378 to suit your personal
preferences. These features are discussed in the
same order that they will appear on your radio,
as you will see on the accompanying charts. An
explanation of the use and purpose of each feature
is provided, followed by a labeled illustration of its
respective LCD display.
In addition, a step-by-step example clarify the setup
procedure of the feature. Practical applications for
many of the radio’s features enable you to see their
true purpose and additional possibilities. A blank
data sheet has been included at the end of each
section. Once all data has been input for a
particular model, it is highly recommended that you
record it on a copy of the sheet provided. If you
should experience memory loss or battery failure or
want to make changes to the current settings, this
step will save you a great deal of time. Following
the data sheet, you will find information on
precautionary measures and general guidelines for
safe use of your new equipment.
Use of the Instructions with the Radio
While the X-378 has a dedicated or single-use
switch layout, it may be used for multiple model
types. Templates have been provided in this manual
that explain the different switch assignments when
using the transmitter with the various air, heli and
sailplane software.
CHAPTER 2: FEATURES
2.1
X-378 TRANSMITTER
The computer designed, ergonomically styled
transmitter case ensures a good, comfortable fit in
your hands. The ultra-precision control sticks offer
adjustable spring tensions and length. The throttle
stick offers a ratchet in Airplane configuration for
smooth travel. 8-model memory storage allows
programming of all characteristics of eight separate
helicopters, airplane or gliders; you can program
more than one setup for a single aircraft, allowing
you to instantly change the flight characteristics.
2.2
Features include automatic fail-safe "set" and
information update in PCM mode when fail-safe is
used. A programmable trainer function allows the
student to practice individual channels separately.
Direct Servo Control (DSC) permits operation of
all the controls and servos without generating a
radio signal.
R700 RECIEVER
NER-700 (FM Systems)
The R700’s is a high-performance FM or singleconversion receiver with 10KHz super narrow band
ABC&W circuitry.
A narrow band ceramic filter for high-signal
selectivity assists in rejecting cross modulations
A five-year lithium backup battery prevents loss of
memory in the event that the battery discharges
completely or is removed.
from other common radio frequencies-e.g., R/C
transmitters, local paging systems. This receiver
features Direct Servo Control (DSC) for control of
surfaces without radio frequency output.
The receiver has low current consumption.
The R700's Slimline design allows it to fit into most
model applications.
X-378 MANUAL Introduction
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
2.3
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 5
S537 BALL BEARING SERVOS
537 Servo
• Wide spaced ball bearing for precise movement
of your aircraft control outputs
• A zero deadband amplifier insures accurate
neutral centering
• Low current drain
• Indirect drive feedback potentiometer gives
additional protection from vibration
• 3-pole ferrite cored motor
CHAPTER 3: COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
3.2
AIRPLANE
HELICOPTER
SYSTEM NAME
X-378A
X-378H
TRANSMITTER BODY
NET-K227FS
Net-K227HS
TRANSMITTER RF MODULE
NET-J72P
NET-J72P
RECEIVER
R700 (FM)
R700 (FM)
CHARGER
NEC-221
NEC-222
AIRBORNE BATTERY
600mah
1100mah
SERVOS
NES-537X4
NES-537X5
ACCESSORIES
Standard Switch
12" Aileron Extension
Charge Jack
Servo Accys
Hex Wrench
Instruction Manual
Standard Switch
12" Aileron Extension
Charge Jack
Servo Accys
Hex Wrench
Instruction Manual
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
AIRPLANE
HELICOPTER
MODEL NUMBER
NET-K227FS
Net-K227HS
ENCODER
7–channel computer system
7–channel computer system
RF MODULE
72MHz
72MHz
MODULATION
PCM (z or s) or PPM
PCM (z or s) or PPM
OUTPUT POWER
Approximately 750mw
Approximately 750mw
CURRENT DRAIN
200mA (70mA with DSC)
200mA (70mA with DSC)
POWER SOURCE
1.2Vx Ni-Cd (9.6V) 600mAh
1.2Vx Ni-Cd (9.6V) 600mAh
OUTPUT PULSE
1000–2000 (1500 Neutral)
1000–2000 (1500 Neutral)
X-378 MANUAL Introduction
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
3.3
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 6
SERVO SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
3.4
537
TORQUE (ounce inch)
43 oz/in
SPEED (sec/60°)
.25 60°
WEIGHT
1.58
SIZE (in) (W x L x H)
1.52 x 0.73 x 1.32
BB
Single
MOTOR
3-Pole Ferrite
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
3.5
FM
MODEL NUMBER
R700
TYPE
7 Channel / FM-ABC&W / Micro
FREQUENCY
72MHz
SENSITIVITY (Microseconds)
5 uS minimum
SELECTIVELY
8KHz/ 5 dB
WEIGHT (oz)
1.5
RECEIVER ANTENNA
39“ for all aircraft frequencies
CHARGER SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
MODEL NUMBER
3.6
AIRCRAFT
NEC-221
NEC-222
INPUT VOLTAGE
AC 100–120V
AC 100–120V
OUTPUT CURRENT
50mAh TX/50mAh RX
50mAh TX/120mAh RX
CHARGING TIME
15 Hours
15 Hours
AIRBORNE BATTERY PACK
TYPE
HELICOPTER
AIRCRAFT
HELICOPTER
MODEL NUMBER
B600
B1000
VOLTAGE
4.8 V
4.8 V
SIZE (in) (W x L x H)
2.24 x 0.59 x 2.05
2.24 x 0.63 x 1.70
WEIGHT (oz)
3.3
4.9
X-378 MANUAL Introduction
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 7
CHAPTER 4: BATTERY CHARGING
4.1
TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER
Note: It is imperative that you fully charge
both the transmitter and the receiver battery
packs prior to each flight. To do so, leave
the charger and batteries hooked up overnight
(16 hours). The first charge should be
approximately 20–24 hours in order to fully
charge both battery packs to peak capacity.
RIGHT SIDE OF TRANSMITTER
The charger supplied with this system is
designed to recharge your batteries at a rate
of 5mAh for the transmitter and 50mAh for
the receiver battery pack.
Transmitter Only
The center pin on all JR Remote Control Systems is
negative. Therefore, the center pin on all JR chargers
is negative, not positive. This is different from many
other manufacturers' chargers and radio systems.
Beware of improper connections based on "colorcoded" wire leads, as they do not apply in this
instance. You must make sure that the center pin of
your JR transmitter is always connected to the
negative voltage for correct polarity hookup.
Important: Please note that the charging
polarity of the transmitter and receiver
are different.
4.2
CENTER
PIN IS
NEGATIVE
OUTSIDE IS POSITIVE
CHARGER PIGTAIL FOR TRANSMITTER
BLACK TO POSITIVE
RED TO NEGATIVE
CHARGER PIGTAIL FOR RECEIVER
RED–POSITIVE / BROWN–NEGATIVE / ORANGE–SIGNAL
CHARGER
The pilot lamps should always be on during the
charging operation. If not, check to make sure that
both the transmitter and receiver are switched off.
Do not use the charger for equipment other than JR.
The charging plug polarity may not be the same.
Equipment damage can result.
Do not use other manufacturers' after-market
accessories that plug into the transmitter's charging
jack. If you do, any damage that results will not be
covered by warranty. If you are unsure of compatabily
issues with your radio, seek expert advice before
X-378 MANUAL Introduction
doing anything to avoid possible damage.
During the charging operation, the charger's
temperature is slightly elevated. This is normal.
Also, note that the voltage shown on the charger is
higher than the battery in use. This voltage cannot
be measured with a voltmeter. Only current can
be measured with any accuracy using this type
of charger.
Be sure to use the proper charger (120mAh)
when using battery packs of 1000mAh or larger for
your receivers.
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
4.3
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 8
ADVANCED DIGITAL TRIMS
Your new X-378 system employs four digital trim
levers for unmatched precision and adjustability.
By using the Trim Step function located in the
System mode, the movement of the ADT trims
can be fine tuned as needed to match your
specific application.
The ADT feature is also designed to automatically
save the determined trim values for each model.
When the X-378 is changed between models in the
Model Select function, the digital trim values will
automatically stay with each model, eliminating
the need for a separate trim memory function.
The X-378's digital trims also feature the Direct
Access display function. While at the Normal
display screen, if a trim lever is moved, the screen
will automatically change to display the numeric
value, as well as the graphic position for the trim
being adjusted.
The X-378's digital trims also feature 2-speed
scrolling . When a substantial amount of trim is
required, holding the trim in the desired position
will activate the dual speed scrolling function.
The X-378's Aileron, Elevator, and Rudder trim
levers (also throttle in sailplane mode) feature
an audible center trim beep. This is helpful in
determining the trim levers center position
during flight.
Please also note that unlike conventional
mechanical trim levers, when the X-378 transmitter
is in the off position, no changes can be made to
the trim values during transportation.
One Touch Digital Throttle Trim Lever (Air and Heli Modes only)
The X-378 also features a revolutionary One-Touch
Digital Throttle Trim lever. While in Air or Heli
modes, the X-378 will remember the maximum high
Throttle Trim position (usually idle) set from the
previous flight. At the end of the flight, move the
Throttle Trim to the full low (engine off) position.
For the next flight, by simply pressing the Digital
Throttle Trim up once, the throttle trim value will
automatically move to the position from the
previous flight. Trim value changes can then be
made by moving the throttle trim lever as needed.
The Direct Access Digital Trim function will display
the throttle trim value numerically and also
graphically on the screen automatically each time
the Throttle Trim is moved
This feature is very helpful as once you have set
the correct throttle trim value for a proper idle, the
X-378 will allow the Trim lever to be set back to this
position for each flight, eliminating the need to set
the exact throttle trim value for each flight.
Note: When the X-378 is in the glider
(sailplane) model type, the Digital Throttle
Trim works as a conventional trim lever, which
is the most desirable method in this mode.
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 9
SECTION II • CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS Airplane
1.1
CONTROL IDENTIFICATION AND LOCATION
Antenna
AUX 2
Lever
Carrying
Handle
Neck Strap Eyelet
Flap Mix Switch
Flap
Lever
Snap Roll/Timer
Trainer/Button
Throttle Cut
Aileron D/R
Switch
Rudder DR
Switch
Gear Switch
Digital
Elevator
Trim Lever
Elevator DR
Switch
On/Off
Switch
Aileron/
Elevator
Control
Stick
Digital Throttle
Trim Lever
Rudder/Throttle
Control Stick
Digital
Aileron
Trim Lever
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Increase/
Decrease
Programming
Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll
Buttons
Channel Key
Clear Key
LCD Display
1.2
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT/THROTTLE ALT
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Channel
TX Function
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Airplane Function
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
Gear Channel
Auxiliary 1 Channel
(Flap)
Auxiliary 2 Channel
(Spoiler)
Throttle ALT
The Throttle ALT function makes the throttle stick
trim active only when the throttle stick is at less
than half throttle. This gives easy, accurate idle
adjustments without affecting the high throttle
position.
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 10
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS Airplane
Airplane Version Transmitter—Sailplane Mode
Flap Mixing
Switch
Crow Switch
Flapperon
Flap Trim
Lever
Oval Flap Aileron
Trim Lever
Timer/Trainer
Button
Elevator DR
Switch
On/Off
Switch
Aileron D/R
Switch
Rudder DR
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
Digital Spoiler
Trim Lever
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Spoiler/Rudder
Stick
Neck Strap Eyelet
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Increase/Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
Clear Key
Channel Key
LCD Display
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
Throttle Channel
Left Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
5. GEAR
Gear Channel
(Right Aileron Channel–AILE 2)
Auxiliary 1 Channel
(Left Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)
Auxiliary 2 Channel
(Right Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)
6. AUX 1
7. AUX 2
Airplane Version Transmitter-Heli Mode
Flight Mode
Switch
Hover Pitch
Lever
Hover Throttle
Lever
Gear Switch
Timer/Trainer
Button
Elevator DR
Switch
Throttle Cut
Button
Rudder DR
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
On/Off
Switch
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Digital Throttle
Trim Lever
Throttle/Rudder
Stick
Neck Strap Eyelet
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Increase/Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
Clear Key
Channel Key
LCD Display
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
10
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
5. GEAR
6. AUX 1
7. AUX 2
Gear Channel
Auxiliarty 1 Channel (Pitch)
Auxiliary 2 Channel
(Gyro Sensitivity)
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 11
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS Airplane
1.3
TRANSMITTER REAR
TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL
CHARGING JACK
FOR Ni-Cd BATTERY
ONLY (8N-600)
DSC/TRAINER JACK
BATTERY COVER (REMOVED)
CAUTION: THE BATTERY
CONNECTOR IS KEYED SO THAT IT
CAN ONLY BE PLUGGED IN ONE
DIRECTION. DO NOT FORCE.
Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice
The Federal Communications Commission (FFC) requires that
changes in transmitter frequency must be performed only by an
authorized service technician (Horizon Service Center). Any
transmitter frequency change made by non-certified technician
may result in a violation of the FCC rules.
THROTTLE TENSION SCREW
ELEVATOR TENSION SCREW
RUDDER TENSION SCREW
AILERON TENSION SCREW
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
11
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 12
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Airplane
1.4
CONTROL STICK LENGTH ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the stick length, use the 2mm Allen wrench
(supplied with your X-378 transmitter) to unlock the
set screw. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to
loosen the screw. Then, turn the stick clockwise to
shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen. After the
control stick length has been adjusted to suit your
flying style, tighten the 2mm set screw. If you desire
longer sticks, JR offers a thicker stick (JRPA047) that
is approximately one inch longer than the standard
stick. This stick, crafted from bar stock aluminum, is
available at your local JR dealer.
1.5
LOOSEN
TIGHTEN
CONTROL STICK TENSION ADJUSTMENT
Remove the Ni-Cd battery and six transmitter back
screws as shown on the previous page. Remove the
transmitter back, being careful not to cause damage
to any components.
1.6
SET SCREW
Adjust each screw for desired tension (counterclockwise to loosen stick feel; clockwise to tighten
stick feel). When adjusting the throttle ratchet
tension, make sure that the adjusting screw does not
touch the PC board after adjustment is complete.
DIRECT SERVO CONTROL (DSC)
For proper DSC hook-up and operation:
1. Leave the transmitter power switch in the Off
position. The transmitter will not transmit any radio
frequency (RF) in this position.
2. Plug the (supplied) DSC cord into the DSC port
in the rear of the transmitter.
3. The encoder section of the transmitter will now
be operational and the LCD display will be lit.
4. Plug the other end of the DSC Cord into the receiver
charge receptacle. Turn the switch harness to the On
position.
2. The DSC function allows you to make final
adjustments to your airplane without transmitting
any radio signals. Therefore, if another pilot is flying
on your frequency, you can still adjust your aircraft
and not interfere with the other pilot’s aircraft.
Note: Under no circumstances should you
attempt to fly your aircraft with the DSC cord
plugged in! This function is for benchchecking your airplane only.
Note: When you install the charging jack, be
sure to hook the charging jack receptacle
securely into the switch harness charge cord.
Why you should use the DSC function:
1. The DSC enables you to check the control
surfaces of your aircraft without drawing the fully
operational 200mAh from your transmitter
battery pack. Instead, you will only draw 70mAh
when using the DSC function.
12
A—Charge Cord/DSC Receptacle
B—Switch Harness Lead
C—Charger/DCS Cord
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 13
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Airplane
1.7
NECK STRAP ATTACHMENT
An eyelet is provided on the face of the X-378
transmitter that allows you to connect a Neck Strap
(JRPA023). This hook has been positioned so that
your transmitter has the best possible balance when
you use the neck strap.
1.8
BASE LOADED ANTENNA
An optional base-loaded antenna is available for use
with the X-378 transmitter. It is considerably shorter
than the standard antenna. However, the base
loaded antenna cannot be collapsed for storage in
the side of the transmitter. You must also use an
1.9
Note: Double-check to ensure that the neck
strap is securely fastened to the transmitter.
adaptor (JRPA156) to attach the antenna to your
X-378. The Base Loaded Antenna (JRPA155) is made
of a flexible coil and is covered with a soft plastic
material. Your range will not be affected when using
the base loaded antenna.
FREQUENCY NOTES/AIRCRAFT ONLY FREQUENCIES
The X-378 transmitter employs a plug-in crystal for
transmitter that is glued in place at the time of
shipment. Per FCC regulation, the transmitter crystal
should only be changed by a certified technician.
Changing of the transmitter crystal by a nonauthorized technician could result in a violation
of FCC rules.
The X-378 can transmit in either Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM) or Pulse Position Modulation
(PPM, commonly referred to as FM).
Be certain to observe the following guidelines:
1. Do not operate your transmitter when another
transmitter is using the same frequency, regardless
of whether the second transmitter is PCM, PPM (FM)
or AM. You can never operate two transmitters on
the same frequency simultaneously without causing
interference to both receivers and crashing both
aircraft.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
2. For operation of your X-378 with additional
receivers, you should refer to the receiver
compatibility chart. The chart is located in the
Modulation Selection Section of this manual.
Aircraft-Only Frequencies
JR Transmitters and receivers are available in 72MHz
frequencies in the United States for use with model
aircraft. Employing 72MHz frequencies does not
require a special operator’s license from the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC).
* A chart for all available frequencies is located on
page 185 of this manual.
13
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 14
CHAPTER 2: CONNECTIONS • Airplane
2.1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
It is extremely important that your radio system be
correctly installed in your model. Here are a few
suggestions on the installation of your JR equipment:
The brass bushings are pushed from the bottom up
in the rubber grommets. When the servo screw is
tightened securely, it provides the proper security as
well as the proper vibration isolation for your servo.
3. The servos must be able to move freely over their
entire range of travel. Make sure that the control
linkages do not bind or impede the movement of any
of the servos.
4. Mount all switches away from the engine exhaust
and away from any high vibration areas. Make sure
the switch operates freely and is able to operate over
its full travel.
5. Mount the receiver antenna firmly to the airplane
to ensure that it will not become entangled in the
propeller or control surfaces.
1. Wrap the receiver in protective foam rubber that
is no less than 3/8 inch thick. Secure the foam to
the receiver with #64 rubber bands. This protects
the receiver in the event of a crash or a very hard
landing.
2. The servos should be mounted using rubber
grommets and brass bushings to isolate them from
vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws;
this will negate the vibration absorption effect of the
rubber grommets. The following
diagram will assist you in
properly mounting
your servo.
2.2
CONNECTIONS
®
4N600
RECEIVER BATTERY 4N-600
4.8V 600mAh
JAPAN REMOTE CONTROL CO., LTD.
DELUXE SWITCH HARNESS
(JRPA0001)
ON
OFF
BATTERY
CHARGECORD OR
D.S.C. RECEPTACLE
(JRPS024)
CHARGECORD OR D.S.C.
D.S.C.-(JRPA132)
CHARGER-(JRPC221)
B AT T
AUXILIARY 1
7 CH 72MHz FM SLIMLINE
RECEIVER
ABC&W INTERFERENCE
PROTECTION SYSTEM
AUX1
GEAR
RUDD
R700 RECEIVER
GEAR
RUDDER
ELEV
AILE
THRO
14
AUXILIARY 2
ELEVATOR
AILERON
THROTTLE
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 15
CHAPTER 3: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Airplane
KEY INPUT AND DISPLAY
The Function Selection keys are used to move up and
down through the functions.The Channel key is used
to advance the channel or function selected. The
Increase and Decrease keys are used to make changes in
the selected functions.
Increase
Up
Function Selection Keys
Decrease
Down
Press both keys at the
same time to enter or
exit the function mode.
Channel
Clear/Store
CHAPTER 4: ALARM AND ERROR DISPLAY • Airplane
4.1
BATTERY ALARM AND DISPLAY
When the transmitter voltage drops below 9.0 volts
DC, the display flashes “BATT” and an alarm sounds
4.2
seven times. If you are flying when this occurs, land
immediately.
BACKUP ERROR DISPLAY
All preprogrammed data is protected by a five-year
lithium battery that guards against main transmitter
battery failure. Should the lithium battery fail, the
display will indicate ERR1 regardless of the position
of the On/Off switch. If this occurs, it will be
necessary to replace the battery and reprogram all
data. All transmitter programs will return to the
factory default settings, and the data you have input
will be lost. When it becomes necessary to replace
the lithium back-up battery, contact JR Horizon
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Service Center. Due to the possibility of extensive
damage caused by improper removal or replacement,
only JR Horizon Service Center is authorized to make
this change.
15
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 16
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.1
NORMAL DISPLAY
When the power switch is in the On position, the
display will read as follows:
Modulation
Type
Model Type
Model Number
Elevator Trim
Throttle Trim
Model Name
Rudder Trim
To enter the System mode, press
simultaneously then turn on the
power switch. To enter the Function
model, turn on the power switch,
then press simultaneously.
5.2
Aileron Trim
In the Timer mode, press the
Channel key to start/stop the timer,
and press the Clear key to reset the
timer.
DIRECT ACCESS DIGITAL TRIMS
The X-378 is equipped with a Direct Access Digital
Trim Value function. When at the normal display,
if a digital trim lever is moved, the screen will
automatically change to show the current trim value
for the channel being adjusted. When the trim is
returned to center, the screen will change back to the
normal display screen after a few seconds.
Current trim value for the channel being adjusted
16
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 17
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.3
SYSTEM MODE
To enter the System mode, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously, then turn the power
switch to the on position. The display will show the
last active program. Pressing either the Up or Down
key then scrolls through the functions one by one,
according to the system mode flowchart shown to
the right. Once the appropriate function is displayed,
changes can be made by pressing the (+) or (-) keys.
System Mode Flowchart
Information pertaining to each function is explained
on the page listed next to the function name.
Functions will appear in the same order they are
shown on this chart.
Model
Selection pg. 18
Model Name
Entry pg. 20
Model
Type pg. 21
Data
Reset pg. 22
Modulation
Selection pg. 23
Data
Transfer pg. 24
Accessing the System Mode
1. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
2. Move the power switch to the On (upper)
position.
3. Use either the Up or Down key to scroll through the
menu and access the applicable function.
Trim
Step pg. 25
Throttle Cut
Switch Activation
pg. 26
Wing
Type pg. 27
Spoiler Channel
Input Selection
pg. 30
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
17
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 18
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.4
MODEL SELECTION/COPY SELECT
The X-378 system offers memory for eight completely
separate models. Therefore, it is possible to have a
mixture of helicopter, airplane and glider setups
retained in memory. It is also recommended that the
Model Name Entry function be used in conjunction
with each model setup. Another very useful function
of the Model Selection function is the ability to set
one aircraft up several different ways. This is helpful
when multi-task performance is desired.
“Model” flashing indicates
Model Select function
Model Name
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Name Entry
Spoiler Channel
Input Select
Copy
Selection
Model Selection
Accessing the Model Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Model should be flashing on the right top portion
of the LCD. If not, press the Up or Down key until
“Model” is displayed and flashing.
3. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will select among each
of the eight models available. Notice that as each
model is selected, its name appears in the left
portion of the LCD.
4. To access the Copy Selection function, press the
Channel key.
18
5. To access the Model Name Entry function, press
the Up key.
6. Once the desired model is displayed on the left,
pressing the Down and Channel keys simultaneously will
exit the Model Selection function and establish the
model displayed as the new current model.
Note: When changing from one model type
to another, it is not necessary to use the Type
Selection function. This is done automatically
by the computer.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 19
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
Copy Selection
The Copy Selection function enables you to copy all
of the settings of the current model to another
model within the same transmitter. This is very
useful when setting up one aircraft several different
ways or when trying an alternative setup of your
current model.
Model number to be copied
Model number to be copied to
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Naming
Spoiler Channel Input Select
Press at Model
Select function
to access Copy
function.
Press Increase or
Decrease to
select model
number to be
copied to.
Press Clear to copy current model to
model number shown at the bottom of
the LCD screen.
Accessing the Copy Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys,
move the transmitter’s power switch to the
On position.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until "Model"
appears flashing on the top right side of the LCD.
3. The number that appears below the flashing
Model is the current model. This is important to note
as only the current model will be the copied or
"from" model. It is imperative to retrieve the proper
current model prior to initiating the copy sequence.
Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the desired
model to be copied.
4. Next, press the Channel key once. The word "Copy"
will appear at the top left of the screen indicating
that the Copy function has been selected.
5. The large number (1-8) at the bottom center of the
LCD indicate the accepting model.
6. Now press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the
accepting model number.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Note: Always make sure that the accepting
model is either free of input or one which
you no longer want to retain in your
transmitter’s memory. Once the copying
process has been completed, the information
of the accepting model is lost and the
current model is input as the new data.
7. Once the desired accepting model is selected,
press the Clear key to complete the Copy Selection
function. The model number at the bottom of the
screen will flash several times, indicating that the
model copy function was successful. The “from”
(template) model’s name and data will now replace
that of the accepting model.
8. To access the Spoiler Channel Input Select
function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Model Naming function, press the
Up key.
10. To exit the Copy Selection function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
19
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 20
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.5
MODEL NAME ENTRY
The X-378 allows a 3-digit name to be input for each
of the eight models available. The current model will
be displayed in the Normal display when the timer is
not active. You may also find this useful to identify
different aircraft setups.
Model Number
Flashing first digit indicates
Model Naming function and
current character to be
changed
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Type
Model Select
Next
character
Select
characters
Clear current
character
Accessing the Model Name Entry Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On (upper) position to enter
the Model Setup mode.
2. Use the Model Selection function to select the
model you want to name. (Please refer to the Model
Selection section at this time.)
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the first digit
of the model to be named is flashing on the left
portion of the LCD.
4. The current name will be displayed in the left
portion of the LCD. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will
select the first alphanumeric character.
20
Note: The character being selected will flash.
5. Press the Channel key to advance the character
selection to the next character.
6. Repeat this procedure until all three characters are
selected.
7. To access the Model Selection function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Type Selection function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Model Name Entry function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 21
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.6
MODEL TYPE SELECTION
The X-378 is capable of performing as a helicopter,
airplane or sailplane radio with full functions for each.
Model Type
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Data Reset
Model Naming
Press to change
model type.
Accessing the Type Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down keys until “Acro,” “Heli,”
or “Glid” is displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
3. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the
type of model.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4. To access the Model Name Entry function, press
the Down key.
5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Up key.
6. To exit the Type Selection function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
21
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 22
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.7
DATA RESET
The Data Reset function permits you to reset all the
functions and settings for the current model to
factory conditions. Resetting does not affect the data
already programmed for other models. Be sure to
confirm that you need to reset the data of the
currently indicated model in order to prevent
accidental loss of your valuable data.
Model number to be reset
Modulation Select
Model Type
Press to Data Reset
current model.
Accessing the Data Reset Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Press the Up or Down key until “RESET” appears in
the center of the LCD display. Be sure that the model
selected is the model you want to reset by checking
the number at the right side of the display.
22
3. To reset data, press the Clear key.
4. To access the Type Selection function, press the
Down key.
5. To access the Modulation Selection function, press
the Up key.
6. To exit the Data Reset function, press both the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 23
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.8
MODULATION SELECT
The Modulation Selection function enables your
X-378 to transmit to a variety of JR receivers that are
already, or may soon be, in existence. You can select
from either of two types of PCM, Z-PCM or S-PCM,
depending on the Central Processing Unit (CPU)
within your receiver or from linear PPM (Pulse
Position Modulation [FM]).
Refer to the receiver compatibility chart below for
the correct modulation.
Modulation
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Data Transfer
Data Reset
Press to change
modulation.
Press to reset to
SPCM modulation.
Accessing the Modulation Select Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move
the power switch to the On position to access the
System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPCM,”
“ZPCM,” or “PPM” appears at the top of the LCD.
3. To change among the modulation types, press
either the (+) or (-) keys.
4. Pressing the Clear key will also reset the modulation
selection to the factory preset S-PCM.
5. To access the Data Reset function, press the
Down key.
6. To access the Data Transfer function, press the Up key.
7. To exit the Modulation Selection function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: When the Data Reset function is used,
the X-378 retains the current modulation
selected for each model. This means that the
modulation type does not change.
Note: In the normal display, the selected
modulation type will appear in the middle of
the LCD.
TX Modulation
Compatible Receivers
# of Channels &
Brief Description
TX Modulation
Compatible Receivers
PPM
PPM
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM
PPM
PPM
NER-226
NER-228
NER-327x
NER-527x
NER-529x
NER-549
NER-600
NER-610M
NER-700M
6 (micro)
7 (micro)
9 (micro)
Z-PCM
Z-PCM
NER-236
NER-627XZ or
627 “G” series
NER-J329P
NER-910XZ
NER-955
NER-D945
NER-649S
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Z-PCM
Z-PCM
S-PCM
S-PCM
S-PCM
# of Channels &
Brief Description
6 (micro)
10
10
10
23
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 24
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.9
DATA TRANSFER
The X-378’s Data Transfer function allows for a model
from one X-378 transmitter to be sent to another
X378 transmitter by using a JR Trainer Cord (JRPA130
sold separately).
Transmitting Transmitter: It will first be necessary
to select the desired model (1-8) to be transferred to
the receiving transmitter. Access the Model Select
function and select the desired model number to be
transferred (see section 6.1 for information).
Indicates that the DSC cord
needs to be inserted, and the
TX power switch needs to be
turned off
Transmit Mode
Trim Step
Modulation
Select
Press to select Transmit (TX)
or Receive (RX ) modes
Transfer Procedure
1. Both transmitters: With the main power switch off,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
while turning the power switch on to enter the
System mode. The word “TXDSC” will be displayed
and flashing.
2. Press the Channel key to select Transmit (TXDSC) or
Receive (RXDSC) modes.
3. Insert the Trainer cord into each transmitter, the
letters DSC will be removed from the screen.
4. Turn off the power switch on each transmitter. The
screen will then change to read either “TXOUT” or
“RXSEL”, depending if transmit or receive modes
were selected.
Note: It is also possible to access the Data
Transfer function as follows:
5. With the main TX power switch off, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously while inserting the
trainer cord into the DSC jack of both transmitters.
24
(The transmitters will now be in System mode
automatically)
6. Press the Channel key to select transmit (TX) or
receive (RX) modes.
7. Both transmitters: In the System mode, press the
Up or Down keys until the words “TXOUT” appears on
the screen. This is the Data Transfer program.
8. Receiving Mode Transmitter (TX to receive
programming): Press the Channel key until the screen
reads “RXSEL.” The word “MODEL” will begin
flashing at the top right portion of the LCD directly
over the current model number selected.
9. Select the receiving model number by pressing the
(+) and (-) keys.
Transmitting Data
10. Press the Clear key to activate the receiving standby mode. The word “RX IN” will now be indicated on
the screen.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 25
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.10
TRIM STEP
The Trim Step function allows the user to increase or
decrease the coarseness of the servo movement as
compared to the steps or beeps of the digital trim.
The total servo trim movement remains the same,
(approx. 30degree) regardless of the trim step rate
selected(1~10). The factory default setting for the
trim step function is 4, which means that for each
UP
DN
step (beep) of the digital trim, the servo will move in
digital increments of 4. In other words, if a finer trip
step value of 1 is selected, the servo will move in a
digital increment of 1for each step (beep) of the
digital trim. If a more coarse trim value of 10 is
selected, the servo will more in a digital increment
of 10 for each step (beep) of the digital trim lever.
CH
CLR
Throttle Cut
Data Transfer
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to increase or
decrease the trim
step rate.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default (4) position.
Press Channel to select
channel to be adjusted
(Throttle, Aileron, Elevator,
Aux 2 Lever, Flap Level).
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
25
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 26
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.11
THROTTLE CUT SWITCH ACTIVATION
This is the function to assign Throttle Cut switch to
the push button located on upper front of the
transmitter. In the System mode, select the Throttle
Cut Switch function (CUT) by using Up or Down keys,
and press (+) or (-) keys to select the function on or
off. The Throttle Cut function is designed to return
the throttle trim to the lowest position instantly and
keep this position while the button is pressed. This
feature is used to “cut” or stop the engine without
changing the position of digital throttle trim.
AUX 2 Switch Selection
Trim Step
26
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to turn the
Throttle Cut function
on and off.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory off position.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 27
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.12
WING TYPE SELECTION
The purpose of the Wing Mixing or Wing Type
function is to eliminate mechanical or programmable mixes that would otherwise be necessary
for the proper flight of certain styles of aircraft. There
are three wing types from which to choose; select the
one that will best suit your R/C aircraft. They are as
follows: Normal, Flapperon, and Elevon (Delta). Each
of the Wing Type selections will be covered below.
Normal Wing Type Selection
This is the first wing type selection that appears on
your LCD display. Use this wing type with common
aircraft that utilize only one servo for both of the
control surfaces. Normal is the factory default setting
for the Wing Mixing function. This means that if data
reset is performed, your radio will return to this
wing type selection. Your X-378 transmitter will
also return to the normal wing mixing type if the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium battery
are both removed from the transmitter.
Wing type
UP
Aux2/Spoiler Channel
Input Select
DN
Throttle Cut
CH
CLR
Press the (+) or (=) keys Press the Clear key to reset to the
to change the wing type. factory default position (NORM).
Accessing the Normal Wing Mixing Selection
1. While the Down and Channel buttons are pressed,
move the power switch to the On position to access
the System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until "WING"
appears at the left portion of the LCD. The current
wing type will be displayed on the upper center
portion LCD: NORM-Normal; FLPER-Flapperon;
DELT-Delta (Elevon).
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to select the desired
wing type.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4. To access the Throttle Cut function, press the
Down key.
5. To access the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Select
function, press the Up key.
6. To exit the Wing Mixing function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: There are not any special receiver port
connections to be made when the Normal
Wing Type Selection is selected.
27
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 28
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
Flapperon Wing Type Selection
Flapperons allow you to use the existing ailerons as
flaps. The ailerons can be raised or lowered in
Connect this servo
to the AUX 1 part
of the receiver.
unison as flaps, yet still remain fully operational as
the ailerons of your R/C airplane.
Connect this servo
to the aileron part of
the receiver.
Accessing and Utilizing the Flapperon Wing Type Selection
1. While the Down and Channel buttons are pressed,
move the power switch to the On position to access
the System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down keys until "WING"
appears in the left portion of the LCD. The current
wing type will be displayed on the Upper center
portion of the LCD: Norm-Normal; FLPER-Flapperon;
DELT-Delta (Elevon).
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to access the
Flapperon (FLPR) Wing Type Selection.
Note: For Flapperon, one servo must be used
for each aileron control surface.
4. Plug the left wing aileron servo into the Auxiliary 1
(AUX 1) port of your JR receiver. Connect the right
aileron servo into the aileron port (AILE) of your
receiver.
5. Check to make sure that the wing servos move
in the proper direction. For a right turn, the right
aileron should raise while the left aileron lowers
simultaneously. For a left turn, the opposite is true;
the left aileron should rise while the right aileron
drops. If your servos are not moving in the direction
just described, use the Servo Reversing function to
reverse the travel direction of the servo(s) that are
moving improperly. Refer to the Servo Reversing
section for information on how to reverse the travel
direction.
Note: Each servo's travel direction is
adjusted individually through the Servo
Reversing function.
28
Once the servos achieve their proper travel direction,
adjust their travel volume, dual rates, sub-trim and
aileron differential.
Note: The applicable channel's left or right
travel adjustment may be made individually
by accessing the Travel Adjust function. Refer
to the Travel Adjust section of this manual
for more information. The fine adjustments
of your aileron controls should be made in
the Dual-Rate function. Refer to the DualRate section for information on how to do
so. You can also adjust the neutral point of
your aileron servos individually through the
use of the Sub-Trim function. Refer to the
Sub-Trim section of this manual for more
information.
6. The flap lever located on the right face of the
transmitter controls the aileron movements as flaps.
Note: Differential is offered for the Flapperon
function of your X-378. For more information,
please refer to the Differential section of this
manual.
8. To access the Throttle Cut function, press the
Down key.
9. To access the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Select
function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Wing Mixing function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 29
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
Delta Wing Type Selection
Delta or Elevon is the final Wing Mixing selection in
your X-378. This style of aircraft also employs two
wing servos. However, there is not an elevator
present. Instead, at an elevator stick input, the two
wing servos function in conjunction with one another
to create an up/down movement of the aircraft. The
wing itself functions as if it were the elevator. Also,
when an aileron control is given, the two wing servos
move in opposition to one another to function as
ailerons.
Connect this servo
to the aileron port of
the receiver.
Connect this servo
to the elevator part
of the receiver.
Delta Wing Type Selection
1. While the Down and Channel keys are pressed, move
the power switch to the On position to access the
System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until "WING"
appears in the left portion of the LCD. The current
wing type will be displayed on the upper center
portion of the LCD: NORM-Normal; FLPERFlapperon; DELTA-Delta (Elevon).
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to select the Delta
(Elevon) Wing Type function.
Note: With the Delta function, one servo
must be used for each elevon, i.e., a separate
servo for each wing half.
4. Plug the left elevon servo to the aileron (AILE) of
your JR receiver. Connect the right elevon servo into
the elevator (ELEV) port of your receiver.
5.Check to make sure that the servos move in the
proper direction. When an input is given from the
elevator stick, they should move in unison to achieve
the proper up/down elevator command. If your
servos do not move in the proper direction as
described above, use the Servo Reversing function
to reverse the travel direction.
Note: Each servo's direction is adjusted
individually through the Servo Reversing
function. For more information, refer to the
Servo Reversing section in this manual.
Note: The applicable channel's left or right,
up or down travel adjustments can be made
individually. Refer to the Travel Adjust
section in this manual for more information.
7. Relative to the note above, each servo's travel
volume is automatically reduced to 75% of the
operating range. This is to ensure that the servo
does not operate beyond its capabilities. Failure to
observe extreme caution when adjusting the value
for the elevon servos may result in damage to the
servos by over traveling.
Note: Fine adjustments of the elevons
should be made in the Dual-Rate function.
For more information, refer to the Dual-Rate
section in this manual. You can also adjust
the neutral point of your elevon servos
individually. To do so, use the Sub-Trim
function as described in the Sub-Trim
section of this manual. Differential is offered
for the elevon function of your XP-783. For
more information, refer to the Differential
Aileron Mixing section of this manual.
9. To access the Throttle Cut function, press the
Down key.
10. To access the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Select
function, press the Up key.
11. To exit the Wing Mixing function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
6. Once the servos have achieved their proper travel
direction, adjust their travel direction, travel volume,
dual rates, sub-trim and aileron differential.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
29
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 30
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Airplane
5.13
AUX 2/SPOILER CHANNEL INPUT SELECT
The purpose of the Aux 2/Spoiler Channel Input
Selection function is to assign the activation device
for the AUX 2 channel. The Lever provides
proportional control, while the switch allows On/Off
function of the AUX 2 channel.
Note: If the spoiler is coupled to the landing
system, the spoiler lever or switch will not
operate the spoiler's channel and "LAND" will
appear in this program.
Switch selected (LEVRG
or MIX SW)
UP
Model Select
Wing Type
DN
CH
CLR
Press the (+) or (-) key to
select the desired switch
to be assigned.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (LEVRG)
Accessing the Spoiler Channel Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the
System Mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until "AUX 2"
appears at the upper right portion of the LCD.
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to assign the
desired switch (LEVRG or MIX SW)
4. To access the Wing Type function, press the
Down key.
30
5. To access the Model Select function, press the
Up key.
6. To exit the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Selection
function, press the Down and Channel keys
simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 31
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.1
FUNCTION MODE
To enter the Function mode, switch the transmitter
power switch to the On position. Press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously, and the display will
show the last active program. Pressing either the Up
or Down key then scrolls through the functions one by
one, according to the Function Mode Flowchart
shown on the right. Once the appropriate function is
displayed, changes can be made by pressing the (+)
or (-) keys. To select another channel of a particular
function, press the Channel key. If you transfer to a
different function that is channel selectable, the
display will show the same channel. For example, if
you are adjusting the dual rate of the elevator and
you change to the Exponential function, the channel
remains elevator. The Function mode is the most
often used system to input data.
Function Mode Flowchart
Information pertaining to each function is explained
on the page listed next to the function name.
Functions will appear in the same order they are
shown on this chart.
Servo Reversing
pg.32
Dual Rate pg.33
Exponential pg.35
Sub-Trim pg.38
Travel Adjust
pg.39
Elevator-toFlap Mixing pg. 40
Aileron-toRudder Mixing
pg. 42
Landing Mode
pg. 44
Snap Roll
Function pg.46
Accessing the Mode Function
1. Move the power switch to the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the
menu and access the applicable function.
Differential
Aileron Mixing
pg. 48
Flap Lever
Adjustment
pg.
Programmable
Mixing pg. 50
Fail-Safe (only
visible when PCM
Modulation is
selected) pg. 52
Trainer Function
pg. 59
Timer Function
pg. 62
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
31
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 32
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.2
SERVO REVERSING
The Reverse Switch function is an electronic means
of reversing the throw of a given channel (servo). All
seven channels of the X-378 offer reversible servo
direction. This will ease setup during the servo
installation into your aircraft.
THRO:
AILE:
ELEV:
RUDD:
GEAR:
Throttle
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Retract
Landing Gear
FLAP: Flap (AUX 1)
SPOI: Spoiler
Channel to be
adjusted
Dual-Rate Function
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to change the
servo direction.
Timer Function
Press Clear to reset
to the factory normal
direction.
Press Channel to change
to the desired channel to
be adjusted.
Accessing the Reverse Switch Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “REV.”
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Using your transmitter’s control sticks, switches
and potentiometers, move the control surfaces of
your aircraft. Note the travel direction of each of the
corresponding control surfaces.
5. After you have determined which channel(s) need
to have the throw directions reversed, use the
32
Channel key to call up the appropriate channel.
6. Press either the (+) or (-) keys to change the travel
direction of the servo. Pressing the Clear key returns
the travel direction to Normal.
7. You can observe the change in the travel direction
by moving the appropriate control at this time.
8. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Dual Rate function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Reverse Switch function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 33
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.3
DUAL RATES
Dual rates are available for the aileron, elevator and
rudder channels of your R/C aircraft. There is also an
automatic dual rate setting to link your aileron,
elevator, and rudder dual rates to the flight model
switch. This automatic Dual-Rate function is
discussed in a separate section that follows. Dual
rates may be defined as the ability to vary the travel
or throw rate of a servo from a switch. Due to the
differing travel rates, you will find that the sensitivity
of the control either increases or decreases
accordingly. A higher rate, or travel, yields a higher
overall sensitivity. You may find it easier to think
of the Dual-Rate function as double-rates or halfrates.The Dual-Rate function works in conjunction
with the Exponential function to allow you to
precisely tailor your control throws. You may want to
consult the section defining exponential for further
information.
Channel to be
adjusted D/R
switch position.
(0 or 1)
Channel to
be adjusted
Exponential
Servo Reversing
Press Channel to select
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,
or Auto D/R to be adjusted.
The amount of travel is adjustable from 0-125% in 1%
increments. The factory setting, or default value, for
both the 0 and 1 switch positions is 100%. Either
Press (+) or (-)
to increase or
decrease D/R
values.
Press Clear to reset
to factory default
settings.(100%)
switch position may be selected as the low or high
rate by placing the switch in the desired position and
adjusting the value accordingly.
Accessing the Dual-Rate Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
on position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “D/R” appears
in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
(aileron, elevator, rudder or automatic dual rates)
appears.
5. Select the switch position for which you want
to adjust the rate. The number to the upper right of
the current rate value on the display indicates the
current position of the Dual-Rate switch for the
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or a 1 will
be shown, corresponding to the position of the
switch. To select the opposite switch position, move
the appropriate Dual-Rate switch to the opposite
position. The number that appears above the current
rate value reflects the change.
6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch
position that you have just selected. To decrease the
throw rate, press the (-) key. To increase the throw
rate, press the (+) key. As stated previously, the
adjustable rate is from 0-125% for each switch
position and channel.
33
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 34
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) •
Accessing the Dual-Rate Function (continued)
Note: You can observe the servo changes by
moving the respective stick while increasing
or decreasing the values. The control changes
accordingly. To clear the dual rate for the respective
channel and switch position, press the Clear
key. After the dual rates have been dialed in
to your satisfaction, we suggest that you begin
to adjust the exponential values. Refer to the
Exponential section for more information.
7. To access the Servo Reversing function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Exponential function, press the
Up key.
9. To exit the Dual-Rate function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
Automatic Dual-Rate
If the Automatic Dual-Rate function AUTO is active
(on), when switching the flight mode switch, aileron,
elevator and rudder channel Dual-Rate values are
switched to preset values settled by position 1.
Flight mode position to
be adjusted
Flight mode position to be adjusted
Condition (off or on)
Exponential
Servo Reversing
Press Channel to
select the desired
flight mode to adjust
(1,2 or HO).
To access this function, move to the D/R (Dual-Rate)
screen, and press the Channel button until the word
“AUTO” appears at the top center of the screen, with a
small box with the number 1 to the far left. This would
indicate the Auto D/R function for Flight mode 1.
Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the function on or off.
Repeat this procedure for flight modes 2 and
34
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to turn the
Auto D/R function
on or off.
Press Clear to return to the
factory default setting (off).
Hold (HO).To confirm that the Auto D/R is
functioning, simply move the flight mode switch
while at any of the normal D/R channel screens. If
the Auto D/R is functioning, the screen will indicate
D/RAT, and the D/R switch position at the far right
of the screen will change from 0 to 1 as the switch
is moved.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 35
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.4
EXPONENTIAL
Programmable exponential adjustments are offered
on the aileron, elevator, and rudder channels of your
R/C aircraft. Exponential is a function that allows you
to tailor the response rate of the stick controls. The
purpose of exponential is to reduce the sensitivity in
the middle portion of stick movement, while still
allowing full travel at the end of the stick movement.
In other words, the end result (travel) remains the
same, although exponential changes the rate at
which it achieves this travel.
The adjustable range of the Exponential Function is
from 0-100%. Zero percent (0%) is linear stick control
which means that the response rate is equal
throughout the stick control. 100% is full
exponential. The larger the exponential value, the
less servo action or sensitivity you will notice around
the neutral setting.
Note: The Exponential function operates in
conjunction with the Dual-Rate function. It is
imperative to understand the Dual-Rate
function prior to adjusting the exponential
values. Exponential may be selected for
either the high or low rate or both.
Dual-Rate switch
position to be
adjusted
Channel to
be adjusted
Sub-Trim function
Dual-Rate
function
Press to select Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,
or AUTO position to be adjusted.
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
Increase or decrease the
Exponential values, or to
activate or inhibit the
Exponential function in the
Auto Dual-Rate modes.
Press Clear to reset
values to the factory
default position.
Accessing the Exponential Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
access the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “EXP” (Exponential)
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
(aileron, elevator, rudder or AUTO) appears.
5. Select the switch position for which you want to
adjust the exponential rate. The number directly
above the exponential value on the display indicates
the current position of the Dual-Rate switch for the
channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or 1 will be
shown, corresponding to the position of the switch. To
select the opposite switch position, move the
appropriate Dual-Rate or Flight mode switch to the
opposite position. The number that appears directly
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
above the Exponential value will reflect the change.
6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch
position that you have just selected. To increase the
exponential rate, press the (+) key. The adjustable
rate is from linear (0%) to100% for each switch
position and channel.
Note: Exponential is an acquired feel. It may
take several test flights to achieve the proper
amount of exponential that fits your flying style.
8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Exponential Function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
35
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 36
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate
When the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate
function is active, the throttle stick position will
automatically switches among the rudder
exponential rates that you have selected in the
exponential section listed above. This means that, as
you advance or pull back the throttle stick, the
rudder exponential rates automatically change.
When the throttle stick is moved anywhere from low
to approximately 70% of full travel, the low (position
0) rudder exponential rates are active; once the
throttle is fully advanced, high (position 1) rudder
exponential will automatically return.
You will find that the automatic rudder exponential
rate is very useful in overcoming special flying
problems. The idea is to have less rudder sensitivity
at high throttle positions because the rudder is more
effective at higher speeds. Conversely, it is more
efficient to have more rudder sensitivity at lower
speeds because the rudder is not as effective. The
Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate function can
also be used in the opposite manner to reduce the
sensitivity of the rudder for takeoffs with models that
have sensitive steering.
On/Off
Sub Trim
Dual-Rate
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to turn the AUTO
function on and off.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (Off).
Press Channel to access
AUTO rate function from
exponential screen.
36
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 37
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Adjusting the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rates
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On
(upper) position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "D/R" appears
in the upper center portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until "AUTO" is displayed.
5. Pressing either the (+) or (-) keys changes the
automatic rudder Exponential rate from off to on. To
return the auto rudder exponential rate to the "Off"
position, press the (+) or (-) keys one more time or
press the Clear key.
6. When the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate
function is active, "EXPAT" will be displayed on the
rudder exponential rate display.
7. The exponential rate value selected for switch
position 0 will be the value used for low throttle stick
operation (Up to approximately 70%); the
exponential rate value selected for switch position 1
will be the exponential value used when the throttle
stick is in the high (full) position.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the
Down key.
9. To access the Sub Trim function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate
function, press the Down and Channel keys
simultaneously.
Note: In order for the Automatic Rudder
Exponential Rate function to operate, the
rudder dual rate switch must be in the 0
position. Moving the dual rate switch to the
1 position negates the operation of the
automatic rudder exponential rate and
defaults the rate to the value for switch 1.
To confirm that the Auto Rudder Exponential Rate is
functioning, simply move the throttle stick while at
the EXPAT screen. If the Auto Rudder Exponential is
functioning, the exponential rate switch position at
the far right of the screen will change from 0 to 1 as
the throttle stick is moved.
37
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 38
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.5
SUB-TRIM
The Sub-Trim Adjustment function allows you to
electronically fine-tune the centering of your servos.
Individually adjustable for all seven channels with a
range of ±125% (+/-30 degrees servo travel), the subtrims can be set for the same neutral settings for
each model stored in the transmitter’s memory.
The sub trim functions provides precise servo arm
neutral positioning if rotating the servo arm will
not allow the desired servo arm position.
Channel to
be adjusted
Sub-Trim Value
Travel Adjust
Exponential
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase or decrease
the Sub-Trim value.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default settings (0%).
Press to select desired
channel to be adjusted (1-7).
Accessing Sub-Trim Adjustment Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. To Access the Function mode, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SUBTRIM”
appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
appears.
5. Press the (+) or (-) key to establish the desired
amount and direction of Sub-Trim.
Note: A (+) or (-) symbol appears to the left of
the sub trim value to indicate the direction of
Sub-Trim input.
38
Caution: Do not use excessive sub-trim
adjustments since it is possible to overrun
your servo’s maximum travel if it is off-center.
Remember that it is a trim convenience
function. It is not intended to take the place
of the proper mechanical trim adjustments
that are necessary on any R/C model. An
offset servo will also produce a
differential effect.
6. To access the Exponential function, press the
Down key.
7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the Up key.
8. To exit the Sub-Trim function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 39
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.6
TRAVEL ADJUST
The purpose of Travel Adjust, also known as endpoint
adjustment or adjustable travel volume, is to offer
you precise servo control deflection in either
direction of servo operation. The X-378 offers travel
adjust for all seven channels. The Travel Adjust range
is from 0-150% (0 degrees to 60 degrees) from
neutral, or center, and it can be adjusted for each
direction individually. The factory default (Data
Reset) value is 100% for each direction of servo travel.
Travel direction to be
adjusted (left/right,
up/down, etc)
Elevator to
Flap Mixing
Channel to be adjusted
UP
DN
CH
Sub-Trim
Press Channel to select
the desired channel to
be adjusted.
CLR
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to increase or
decrease the Sub
Trim values.
Press Clear to reset to factory
default settings (100%).
Accessing the Travel Adjust Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRAVL”
appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
appears.
5. Move the appropriate control stick (lever, switch,
etc) to the right or left of center to the direction of
travel you want to adjust. An arrow to the right of the
travel adjust value will reflect the current position to
be adjusted. Using our example above, if the aileron
stick is moved to the left, a left-facing arrow will
appear to the left of the travel adjust value on the
LCD screen.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
6. After the control stick or switch is placed in the
direction of travel to be adjusted, press the (+) or (-)
key until the proper amount of servo travel is shown
on the lower right side of the LCD. Press the (+) key
to increase the amount of servo travel. Press the (-)
key to decrease the amount of servo travel.
7. Follow the same procedure for the remaining
channels.
8. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Throttle Hold (or CCPM Mix if
activated) function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Travel Adjust function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
39
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 40
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.7
ELEVATOR-TO-FLAP MIXING
When this system is active and a value of flaps is
input, the flaps will be deflected each time the
elevator stick is used. The actual flap movement is
adjustable for both up and down elevator. The most
frequently used application is up elevator/down flaps
and down elevator/up flaps. When used in this
manner, the aircraft pitches much more quickly than
normal. The upper-most position of the Flap Mixing
switch activates the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing circuitry.
Up/Down arrows change when
the elevator stick is moved, and
indicate current position to be
adjusted
Current mix switch position (Up=ON, center or
low position displays OFF)
UP
DN
CH
Aileron-to-Rudder
Mixing
Travel Adjust
Current mixing
value
CLR
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase or decrease
the mixing value for
each position.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (0%).
Accessing the Elevator to Flap Mixing Functiion
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Press either the Up or Down key until "ELEV-FLAP"
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
Note: If the Flap Mixing switch is not in the
uppermost position, the position indicator
will read "OFF". The flap mixing switch must
be in the upper (elevator) mix position in order
to make adjustments to the flap mixing value.
3. Move the elevator stick in the direction you want
to mix with flaps.
Note: The position indicator will reflect this
change by replacing the up arrow with a down
arrow or vice-versa. A down arrow indicates up
elevator, and an up arrow indicates down
40
elevator (arrow position is indicating stick
position, not elevator direction.
5. Press the (+) or (-) key to increase or decrease the
amount of flaps to be mixed. If you want to reverse
the flap travel, press the Clear key, bringing the
mixing value to the factory default (0%), and increase
the value using the opposite key (+) or (-) from the
key originally selected.
6. Once you have adjusted the first mixing position
(up or down), place the elevator stick in the opposite
direction and follow Step 5 above to adjust the
second elevator mixing value.
7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Up key.
9.To exit the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 41
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Note: Only the elevator input indicated by
the LCD will be cleared. For example, if the
up arrow were displayed and CLR were
pushed, the down arrow value would still be
retained by the transmitter. In order to
change elevator operating direction, move
the elevator control stick in the direction you
want to mix with flaps. Using our example,
we would input down elevator. The down
arrow would be displayed at the lower left
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
portion of the LCD. Our mixing value would
also change to reflect our input. If the Flap
Mixing switch is not in the uppermost
position, the position indicator will change
from “On’’ to “Off’’. This indicates that the
Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is not
currently active. Although the current mixing
value will still be displayed, it will not be
possible to alter this value until the mix
switch is returned to the on position.
41
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 42
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.8
AILERON-TO-RUDDER MIXING
This form of mixing is designed so that when input
to the aileron stick is given, the rudder servo will also
move, eliminating the need to coordinate these
controls manually.
When adjusting, if an opposite mixing direction of
the rudder servo is required, simply press the (+) or
(-) keys to change the mixing value from a (+) to (-)
or a (-) to a (+). This will reverse the mixing direction
of the rudder from its original direction. The switch
used to activate this mix can also be selected as
explained below. The factory default mix switch for
the Aileron-to-Rudder mix function is Rudder
D/R/Mix switch located at the upper right side of the
transmitter.
Mixing Value
Mixing switch position
UP
Landing Mode
Elevator-to-Flap Mixing
DN
CH
Press Channel to
access the mixing
switch assignment
function.
CLR
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to adjust the
mixing value, or to
select the mix switch
assignment.
Press the Clear key to reset to
the factory default position.
Accessing the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Press either the Up or Down key until "AILE-RUDD"
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
Note: If the current mixing switch is not in the
on position, the position indicator will read
"OFF." The current mixing switch must be in
the On position in order to make adjustments
to the Aileron- to-Rudder mixing value.
42
4. With the current mix switch on, press the (+) or (-)
key to increase or decrease the amount of rudder to
be mixed with aileron. If you want to reverse the
Rudder Mix direction, press the Clear key, bringing
the mixing value to the factory default (0%), and
increase the value using the opposite key (+) or (-)
from the key originally selected.
5. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,
press the Down key.
6. To access the Landing Mode function, press the
Up key.
7. To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 43
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Assigning the Mixing Activation Switch
The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing program can be
turned on and off using several different assignable
switch options. The switches that can be selected are
shown to the right of the LCD display below.
Mixing switch selected
Selected switch position
(On or Off)
UP
Landing Mode
Elevator-to-Flap Mix
DN
CH
CLR
Press the Channel key Press the (+) or (-)
to access the switch
keys to select the
assignability option.
desired switch or
function to activate the
Aileron-to-Rudder Mix.
Press the Clear key to
select the On option.
Assigning the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Switch Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "AILERUDD" appears in the center portion of your LCD.
4. Press the Channel key to access the switch
assignment function.
5. Press the (+) or (-) key to select the desired
switch/function to activate the Aileron-to-Rudder
Mixing function.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
6. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,
press the Down key.
7. To access the Landing Mode function, press the
Up key.
8. To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
43
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 44
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.9
LANDING MODE FUNCTION
The Landing Mode function automatically couples
the spoilers to the landing system. This inhibits the
use of the AUX 2 lever, preventing activation of the
spoilers at any other time than during use of the
landing system. Spoilers are connected to the AUX 2
channel on the receiver. The spoiler activation device
will then be linked to the landing position of the Flap
Mix switch.
Channel to be adjusted
Switch Position
Channel Mixing Value
Snap Roll Function
Aileron-to-Rudder Mix
Press Channel to select
the desired channel to be
adjusted.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default position
Accessing the Landing Mode Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3 .Press either the Up or Down key until "LAND"
appears in the center of the LCD.
4 .Press the Channel key until "THRO" appears at the
upper right portion of the LCD.
5. Press the Channel key to select the desired
channels to be adjusted.
6. Use the (+) or (-) keys to set the desired landing
mode surface positions.
Note: The Flap position switch must be placed
in the LAND position for the values of the
Landing Mode function to be altered/adjusted.
If the display indicates "OFF," values cannot
be altered.
To Inhibit the Aux 2 Lever
1. Press the Channel key until "INH" is displayed in
the upper portion of the LCD.
2. Press the (+) or (-) keys to inhibit the Aux2 lever.
The display will change from "IHN" to "ACT,"
indicating that the Aux2 switch inhibit function has
been activated. To check to see that the Aux2 lever
has been de-activated, move the Aux2 lever while at
the Aux2 switch selection screen. If the lever is
44
deactivated, the display will not indicate changes
when the switch is pressed.
3. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down key.
4. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Up key.
5. To exit the Landing Mode function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 45
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Automatic Landing Mode Function
1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function Mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "LAND THRO"
appears in the upper portion of the LCD, with (-) at
the bottom right corner.
3. Set the Flight mode switch in the LAND position
(Low).
4. Move the throttle stick to the desired position and
press the (+) or (-) key. The (-) on the display will
change to indicate the current throttle stick position
value, and an "A" will appear at the upper right
portion of the display. This is now the auto land
point. To change this value, move the stick to a new
position and press the (+) or (-) key. To clear the auto
land point, press the Clear key.
5. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down key.
6. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Up key.
7. To exit the Automatic Landing Mode function,
press the Up and Down keys simultaneously.
Note: When this function is active, the letter
"A" will appear at the upper right portion of
the LCD.
Automatic Landing System
When the Automatic Landing Mode function is
active, the throttle stick will activate the landing
system setup on the preceding page. Any point of
throttle stick travel can be set as the auto landing
point. Once the throttle stick passes through this
point, and the Flap Mix switch is in the land
position, the landing system will be activated. Thus,
the elevator, flaps and spoilers would be activated if
all were selected. If the Flap Mix switch is not in the
Land function, the throttle operation will have no
effect on the landing system.
Note: When the Automatic Landing function is
active, the letter "A" will appear at the upper
right portion of the LCD.
Landing mode function is
activated
Current throttle stick
activation point
Snap Roll Function
Aileron-to-Rudder
Mixing
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Press the (+) or (-) key to
set the Landing Mode
position for each channel.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position.
Press the Channel Key
to select the desired
channel to be adjusted.
45
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 46
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.10
SNAP ROLL FUNCTION
The Snap Roll function allows for easy and
consistent snap rolls at the touch of a switch. The
X-378 offers four separate directions of snap rolls
that you can select by using the keys located on the
front of the transmitter.
Selectable snap rolls are as follows:
R-DN
Snap Roll Right and Down
R-UP
Snap Roll Right and Up
L-DN
Snap Roll Left and Down
L-UP
Snap Roll Left and Up
The Snap Roll switch affects the aileron, elevator and
rudder only; all other functions work as normal.
While the snap roll switch is activated, the related
sticks will not operate until the switch is released.
When this function is inhibited, the display will show
"INH" and the snap roll system will not operate.
Individual adjustment is available for each control
surface in either direction. The adjustable range for
each function is 0-125%; the factory default is 100%.
When the Snap Roll function is active, the direction
will be indicated with the appropriate arrows in the
bottom left portion of the normal display screen.
Press Channel key
CLR
Snap Roll type selected
Differential Aileron Function
Landing Mode Function
46
Press to select
desired channel
to be adjusted.
Press the (+) or (-) Press the Clear key to
keys to adjust the reset to the factory
default position (100%).
value for each
channel.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 47
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Snap Roll Function
1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "S.ROLL"
appears in the center portion of the LCD.
4. Press the (+) or (-) key until the desired snap roll
direction is displayed in the upper portion of the
LCD directly above "S.ROLL."
5. Press the Channel key to display each of the three
channels with their respective control values. Press
the (+) or (-) key to increase or decrease the values
for each control. The adjustable value
is 0-125%.
AILE - Aileron
ELEV - Elevator
RUDD - Rudder
6. Press the Channel key until the snap roll direction
is displayed again. Press the (+) or (-) key to change
the snap roll to the next direction. All four snap rolls,
with travel values, can be set Up for each airplane
and retained in memory.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 again as needed.
8. To access the Automatic Landing Mode function,
press the Down key.
9. To access the Aileron Differential function, press
the Up key.
10.To exit the Snap Roll function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
Snap Roll Direction Change
Once the snap rolls are established in the Function
mode, they can be selected using the keys located on
the front of the transmitter while in the normal
display. The keys shown below will explain how to
make these changes.
Note: When the Snap Roll function is active,
the snap roll switch will not activate the
stopwatch. It can be started and stopped
using the (+) or (-) keys.
Caution: When the transmitter is being used
as the master transmitter while training, the
Snap Roll Function is inhibited.
Snap roll
direction—the
example shown
is Right-Down
(R-DN)
UP
Press to select Up
Snap Roll.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
DN
Press to select Down
Snap Roll.
CH
CLR
Press to select
Left Snap Roll.
Press to select Right Snap Roll.
47
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 48
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.11
DIFFERENTIAL AILERON MIXING
The X-378 transmitter offers aileron differential for
the flapperon and delta-wing mixing selections.
Differential ailerons are used to tailor the flight
control system to a particular aircraft. Because the
downward travel of the aileron creates more drag
than does the upward travel, it is necessary to reduce
the amount of down travel for each aileron
electronically. This drag may very well produce a
yawing tendency in your aircraft. As yaw is
undesirable in most, if not all, R/C aircraft, it is best
to correct for this common flight tendency. Aileron
differential overcomes the yaw as it reduces the
downward travel of the ailerons.
Note: In order to use the Differential function,
flaperon or delta-wing mixing must be selected
in the System mode, and two servos must be
used to operate the ailerons, one each. Refer to
the Wing Mixing section for more information.
Differential Value
UP
Flap Lever
Adjustment
48
DN
Snap Roll Function
CH
Press the (+) or (-) keys to increase
the value (range 0-100%).
CLR
Press the Clear key to reset to the
factory default position (0%).
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 49
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Differential Aileron Mixing Function
1.Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2.Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3.Press either the Up or Down key until "DIFF."
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD. Press the
(+) or (-) key until the desired amount of differential
is established. The operating range for differential is
0% (NORM) to 100% (SPLIT). The following diagrams
may ease the understanding of the differential
aileron.
If left at 0%, the ailerons maintain equal travel for
both sides. There will not be any differential
whatsoever. If set at 50%, the aileron that is lowered
travels 50%, or half, as far as the upward aileron. If
adjusted to 100%, you achieve what is commonly
referred to as a "split." This means that the only
aileron that moves is the aileron that travels upward.
The aileron that normally drops remains stationary.
4. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Down key.
5. To access the Flap Lever Adjustment, press the Up key.
6.To exit the Aileron Differential Mixing function,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
MIXING FUNCTION
NORM: 0% Differential
DIFF: 50% Differential
SPLT: 100% Differential
49
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 50
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.12
FLAP LEVER ADJUSTMENT
The Flap Lever Adjustment function allows the
output value of the Flap Channel (Aux1) lever (Front
right of TX) to be adjusted to allow for fine or coarse
movement of the flaps relative to the Lever.
the Flap Mix switch when the Landing Mode is selected,
and a value is given. This is the most commonly used
function of the Flap Lever Adjustment function. The
factory default position is 0%.
There are 3 different options for this function, they
are as follows:
FULL
When this function is selected, the flaps will operate
through the flap lever. This function is used only
when the Landing Mode function is not selected. The
factory default position is 100%.
TRIM
This function is used in conjunction with the
Landing Mode function. When selected, the flaps
position can be adjusted using the flap lever while in
Landing Mode. This is not a commonly used
function. The factory default position is 30%.
OFF
When this function is selected, the flap lever is
deactivated. The flaps will now only function through
Please note that if both the Landing Mode and the
Full functions are selected, both functions will be
operational. This is not a desirable option.
The value of the flap lever can be altered to any
desired value using the (+) or (-) keys. This function
makes fine-tuning of the flaps very easy.
Current value
Programmable Mix #1
Snap Roll Function
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
increase or decrease the
values as needed.
Press the Clear key to select
the desired function (TRIM,
OFF, or FULL).
Accessing the Flap Lever Adjustment Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "LEVER TRIM"
appears in the center of the LCD.
4. Press the Clear key to select the desired function to
be adjusted (TRIM, OFF, FULL).
50
5. Press the (+) or (-) key until the desired amount of
flap travel is established.
6. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Down key.
7. To access the Programmable Mix #1 function,
press the Up key.
8. To exit the Flap Lever Adjustment function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 51
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.13
PROGRAMMABLE MIXING 1-6
The X-378 offers six programmable mixes to be used
for any number of different purposes. This function
allows mixing any one channel to any other channel
to make the aircraft easier to fly. This mix can remain
on at all times or be switched on and off in flight
using a number of different switches.
Mix numbers 1-4 are of the standard variety, in that
the digital trim for the master channel only affect the
master channel, and not the slave channel.
Mix numbers 5 and 6 are of the "Trim Include"
variety. These mixes are used any time the mix you
are performing requires the slave channels trim
position to be varied when the master channels
digital trim position is varied. An example for this
type of mix would be when dual elevator or dual
aileron servos are used and connected to two
separate channels of the system, rather than using
a single channel with a Y-harness.
Each channel of this radio is identified by an
abbreviated name. The chart below indicates the
channel and its corresponding abbreviation. The
channel name appearing first is known as the
"master channel" or the channel to which you want
to mix. The second number is known as the "slave
channel" or the channel that is being mixed into the
master channel. For example, "AILE-RUDD" would
indicate aileron-to-rudder mixing. Each time the
aileron stick is moved, the aileron will deflect, and
the rudder will automatically move in the direction
and to the value input.
Mixing is proportional, so small inputs of the master
channel will produce small outputs of the slave
channel. Each programmable mix has a mixing
"offset." The purpose of the mixing offset is to redefine the neutral position of the slave channel.
THRO:
AILE:
ELEV:
RUDD:
GEAR:
Throttle
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Retract
Landing Gear
FLAP: Flap (AUX 1)
SPOI: Spoiler
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Programmable Mix #2
Flap Lever Adjustment
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
select the Master channel.
51
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 52
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
to enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "MIX 1"
appears in the upper right portion of the LCD.
Slave Channel
Master Channel
Stick position
to be adjusted
UP
Programmable Mix #2
Flap Lever Adjustment
Function
Mixing Value
Mix currently on
DN
CH
Press the Channel key to move
through the mixing functions
(Master/Slave Channel, Mix
Switch Activation, Offset Value)
Press the Clear key to store
the offset value or to reset
the mixing values to the
factory default positions.
Selecting the Master and Slave Mixing Channels
4. Press the (+) key to activate the mix. Next, press
the (+) or (-) keys again to select the master channel.
5. Press the Channel key to move the cursor to the
slave channel position.
6. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the slave channel.
7. Press the Channel key once. The display will
continue to show the current mixing channels at the
top of the LCD, but will now have a flashing arrow at
the bottom left of the LCD to indicate the current
stick position (master) to be adjusted.
LCD with the word "ON" located in the upper right of
the LCD. This indicates the current switch
assignment to activate this mix. "ON" indicates that
this mix is currently selected to always be active (ON).
Setting the Mixing Values
8. While holding the master stick in the direction you
want to mix, press the (+) or (-) keys to increase or
decrease the mixing value for the slave channel. The
value at the lower right of the LCD will change to
display the current mix value selected. Next, hold the
master stick to the other side to adjust the mix for
the other direction.
The mix switch options for Mix #1, 2, and 5-6 are:
ON:
Always On
MIX:
Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch
LAND: Activated in the LAND position of the Flap Mix
switch
ELE>F: Activated in the ELEV position of the Flap Mix
switch
Note: The current mixing switch must be in
the On position for the mixing values to be
adjusted.
Setting the Mixing Switch Activation
9. Press the Channel key once again. The display will
have "SW ON" indicated at the center portion of the
52
CLR
Mixing Operation and Switches
Each mixing program can be turned on and off by a
lever or switch. The levers and switches that can be
selected for program mixing are tabulated at the
right with their abbreviations appearing on the
display and their corresponding positions.
The Mix switch options for Mix # 3 and 4 are:
ON:
Always On
GEAR: Activated by the Gear Switch
LAND: Activated in the LAND position of the Flap Mix
switch
ELE>F: Activated in the ELEV position of the Flap Mix
switch
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 53
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function continued
Setting the Mixing Channel Offset
1. Press the Channel key once again. The display will
show the current mixing channels at the top of the 4
LCD, with the word "OFFSET" at the center of the
LCD. The value to the lower right is the mixing Offset
neutral point, currently 0.
2. Hold the master stick in the position you want to
make the neutral point of the slave channel and push
the Clear key. A new value with a (+) or (-) sign will
appear. This is the new neutral point for the slave
channel (Point that the mix is activated). To reset the
value back to 0, move the master stick back to the
center position, and press the Clear key to reset.
Setting the Mixing Values
The X-378 transmitter has six multi-purpose
programmable mixes available. For these mixing
operations, first determine the mix type required
(standard 1-4, or trim include 5-6), master and slave
channels, offset and operating switch settings, if
necessary, and then adjust the mixing value.
For setting mixing value, move and hold the master
channel control (up, down, left or right) and set the
slave servo mix value by pressing either the (+) or
(-) keys. To reverse direction of the slave mix, press
the opposite of the (+) or (-) keys until the value of
mix is set in the reverse direction.
Note: The master channel trim must be
centered for this to reset to 0 using the Clear key.
Please also note that if the reference of the offset
point is moved (see section below), the slave
channel's direction will change from that position.
3. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
exit the Programmable Mix function.
Note: With a little practice, programmable
mixing will become easier compared with the
first time you try it. The best part of a
computer radio is that if you don't like
something, you can change it. Mixing is only
limited by your imagination.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Setting the Mix Offset Position
Any position of the master channel can be used as a
reference (starting) point for mixing. This is useful for
channels that have no neutral position. With this
function, you can use program mixing with respect to
an arbitrary position of the lever/switch. To set the
offset position, put the master channel at the desired
position and press the Clear key. The position is
stored in the memory and its offset value from the
neutral position is indicated numerically on the
display. Once this offset point has been set, the
mixing value at the offset position is now set to zero.
53
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 54
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Functions Related to Program Mixing
Selecting Flaps (Aux1) for the master channel:
When the slave channel is 2 (aileron), its mixing
operation is affected by aileron differential settings.
When the slave channel is 6 (flap), its mixing
operation is affected by flap-to-aileron mix settings.
When dual flaps are selected, and the slave channel
is 7 (AUX 2), its mixing operation is affected by the
aileron differential settings.
Trim Include Mixes 5 and 6
Programmable Mixes 5 and 6 offer mixing with the
Trim Include function. The Trim Include function is
automatically activated when mixes 5 and 6 are used.
Mixes 5 and 6 with Trim Include
Whenever the master channel is aileron, elevator,
rudder or throttle, you have the option of allowing
the master channel's trim lever to mix into the slave
channel. The Mixing with Trim function is always
activated in Mixes 5 and 6. You can observe the
operation by watching the slave channel while
moving the master channel's trim lever.
Note: If you have not yet entered values for the
mixing percentages, the slave channel will
remain stationary. Also, if the mixing
percentages are minute, the movement of the
slave channel from the trim lever is also minute.
54
Include Mixing
The Include Mixing function allows other
programmed mixing values for the master channel.
As stated previously, they Include Mixing function is
always activated in Mixes E and F.
For example,
Mix 3:
Mix 6:
AILE - THRO
THRO - RUDD
Mix 6's operating value also now includes the
operating value from Mix 3's master channel
(Aileron). By moving the aileron control stick, Mix 3
has the ailerons mixing into the throttle, and now
also the rudder from Mix 6. At the same time, Mix 6
is mixing the throttle into the rudder only. Since the
Include Mixing is always active, you are also mixing
your ailerons into the rudder. This results in the
aileron stick moving not only the aileron servo but
also the throttle and rudder servos.
Include Mixing may sound complex, but it actually
eliminates the need for a third mixing program to
mix the aileron and rudder channels. Therefore,
Include Mixing reduces the number of mixing
programs needed when using multiple mixing
functions.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 55
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.14
FAIL SAFE/HOLD FUNCTION (PCM ONLY)
The Fail-Safe/Hold function is available only when
you use the X-378 transmitter in either of the PCM
modulations-S-PCM or Z-PCM. This function is
designed to help minimize damage to your aircraft
during a loss of signal to the receiver. The servos
either assume the fail-safe presets or hold their last
good signal position.
Note: In the PCM modulations, the FailSafe/Hold function cannot be totally
disabled so that the servos will react to
interference in the same way as they do in a
PPM (FM) system. This is only possible with
the use of a PPM receiver and the transmitter
in the PPM modulation. Since the actual
screen appearance varies depending on the
modulation of your radio, refer to the
appropriate modulation section that follows.
As noted earlier, if you are in the PPM modulation,
the Fail-Safe/Hold function is not applicable.
Therefore, the Fail-Safe/Hold function will not appear
on your LCD screen menu while in the PPM mode.
Refer to the Modulation Selection section for more
information pertaining to the broadcast signal of
your X-378 transmitter.
Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in Z-PCM Modulation
Hold (Z-PCM)
The Hold function is automatically activated when
the radio is turned on and is in the Z-PCM
modulation. This function stops (or holds) the servos
in the positions they were in just prior to the
interference. Therefore, your aircraft maintains the
position held immediately before the interference
was experienced. When a clear signal is restored, the
Hold function releases, and control of the airplane
returns to you.
Channel to be
programmed
HO: HOLD
0.2: .25 SEC
0.5: .50 SEC
1.0: 1.0 SEC
UP
DN
Trainer Function
Programmable Mix 6
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
CH
CLR
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to select the desired hold
delay time.
Move the control sticks to the
desired HOLD position, then press
Clear to store these positions.
55
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 56
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the PCM Hold Function (Z-PCM)
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On
position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
access the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the "FAIL S"
(Fail-Safe) appears in the upper left portion of the
LCD.
Note: If "Fail-Safe" does not appear on your
LCD, it is because you are transmitting in
PPM. Fail-safe is not applicable in the PPM
mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode
Selection section for more information.
You should never attempt to adjust the FailSafe function when the aircraft is running.
When the Fail-Safe function is activated (i.e., when
the signal is interrupted), the transmitter
automatically moves each servo to a preset position.
The position that each servo assumes is determined
by you, as is the time length of interference that
must occur before servo movement.
After the interference has ceased, control of the
aircraft returns immediately to you. There are three
time delays to choose from: 0.25 second, 0.5 second
and 1.0 second. These time delays are the amount of
time it takes, starting the moment the interference
occurs, until the servos assume their preset
positions.
Setting the Fail Safe/Hold Memory in Z-PCM Modulation
1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, adjust the
fail-safe presets.
2. Select among the three time delays (.25, .50 or 1.0
second) by pressing the (+) or (-) key until the
appropriate delay appears on the screen.
3. Next, hold the transmitter sticks in the positions
that you want the servos to assume during signal
loss conditions. You can determine fail-safe preset
positions for the other channels by placing the other
channel switches in the positions that you want
them to assume during interference.
4. With the sticks and switches in the desired failsafe positions, touch the Clear key. This will enter
these locations as the fail-safe memory settings.
A single high-pitched beep will be hear when the
Clear key is pressed indicating that the positions
have been memorized.
5. To confirm that the input of data was successful,
switch the transmitter off. The controls will move to
the input locations. If not, repeat Step 4 again.
56
Note: These preset positions remain stored
in the transmitter's memory until both the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium
back-up battery have been removed (or until
data reset has been performed). Therefore,
you do not have to reset the Fail-Safe each
time you fly. Should you want to re-adjust
the Fail-safe presets, access the Fail-Safe
function and adjust the presets as you have
just done. The transmitter automatically
recalls the settings for the last fail-safe
adjustment.
7. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Fail-Safe function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 57
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold in S-PCM Modulation
The S-PCM Hold function is automatically activated
when the radio is turned on and is in the
S-PCM modulation. This function stops (or holds)
the servos in the positions they were in just prior to
the interference. Therefore, your aircraft maintains
the position held immediately before the interference
was experienced. When a clear signal is restored, the
Hold function releases, and control of the aircraft
returns to you.
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. While the power switch is in the On position, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to access
the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the "FAIL-S"
(Fail-Safe) appears in the upper left portion of the
LCD.
Note: If "Fail-Safe" does not appear on your
LCD, it is because you are transmitting in
PPM. fail-safe is not applicable in the PPM
mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode
Selection section for more information.
Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modualtion
The X-378 allows you to combine the Hold and FailSafe presets for all seven channels on the receiver.
You can select Fail-Safe or Hold independently for
all channels on your aircraft. In other words, some
channels will hold their last clear signal position
(HOLD), while others assume the preset position
(Fail-Safe), Once the Fail-Safe has been activated by
signal interruption (interference), the transmitter
automatically moves the servos to a preset position.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
The predetermined servo positions are set by you. In
the S-PCM Fail-Safe, the time delay (the amount of
time it takes, starting the moment the interference
occurs, until the servos assume the preset positions)
is fixed at .25 seconds. After the interference has
ceased, normal operation of the aircraft returns to
you immediately.
57
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 58
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Setting the Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Moduation
1. Select all of the channels for which you want to
enter a Fail-Safe preset. To do so, use the Channel key
until the appropriate channel name appears in the
upper right portion of the LCD. We will use the
Aileron (AILE) for our example. The display will
appear as shown above.
2. Press either the (+) or (-) key. This will change the
display from Hold (HO) to the Fail-Safe (F.S.) preset
display.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for all channels desired to be
set to the Fail-Safe (F.S.) position.
4. Hold all of the appropriate transmitter control
sticks and switches in the desired positions and
press the Clear key. This will enter the location as the
fail-safe memory setting for all channels selected to
F.S. When the Clear key is pressed, a single high pitch
beep will be heard indicating that the Fail-Safe positions
have been stored. Continuing our example, hold the
aileron stick to the right and press the Clear key.
6. To confirm that the input of data was successful to
the applicable channels, switch the transmitter off.
All channels selected to Fail-Safe (F.S.) should to
their selected positions.
Note: These preset positions remain stored
in the transmitter's memory until both the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium
back-up battery have been removed (or until
the Data-Reset function has been utilized).
Therefore, you do not have to reset the FailSafe each time you fly. Should you want to
re-adjust the Fail-Safe preset position,
access the Fail-Safe function once again and
adjust the presets as you have just done. The
transmitter automatically recalls the settings
for the latest fail-safe adjustment.
8. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press
the Down key.
9. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Fail-Safe/Hold function, press the Up
and Down keys simultaneously.
Indicates Fail-Safe
channel to be
programmed
UP
Trainer Function
58
DN
CH
Press Channel to
Press the (+) or (-)
select
the desired
Programmable
Keys to select Hold
channel to be
Mix 6
(HO) or Fail-Safe
programmed.
(F.S.) modes for
each channel.
CLR
Press the Clear key to store
the fail-safe servo positions
for all channels set to F.S.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 59
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.15
Trainer System
The X-378 transmitter employs two separate types of
trainer systems:
1) Normal Trainer System
All functions are controlled by either the master
transmitter (MAST) or the slave transmitter (SLAVE).
2) Programmable Function Trainer
Individual Channel functions may be assigned to the
slave one at a time. Since the control functions can
be transferred one by one, students can concentrate
on only one function at a time until they are
competent to fly solo with all controls.
Trainer function
type selected (N for
Normal, P for
Programmable)
Trainer Mode
(Master or
Slave)
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Timer Function
Fail-Safe Function (If PCM
Modulation is selected)
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
Press Channel to
select the desired
channel to be
programmed.
Press the (+) or
(-) keys to change
the settings of
each channel.
Press Clear to reset
to the factory
default settings
(Normal).
59
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 60
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Programmable Trainer Function
1.Move the transmitter switch to the On position.
2.Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press the Up or Down keys until "MAST" appears on
the center portion of the LCD.
4.Press the Channel key to select the channel to be
adjusted. The channel name will be displayed just to
the right of "MAST."
5.Once the channel appears that you want to make a
slave, press the (+) or (-) key. This will change the
display from "MAST" to "SLAVE." The "N" at the
upper right portion of the LCD will also change to
"P". If you want to make more slave channels, press
the Channel key until the next desired channel is
shown and press the (+) or (-) key to change the
settings.
Channel has been set to
programmable Trainer mode
Channel to be adjusted
6. To change the Programmable Trainer Function back
to the Normal Trainer System, press the Clear key.
7. To access the Fail-Safe function, press the Down key.
60
8. To access the Timer function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Trainer function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 61
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Basic Connections and Conditions for Training
1.The slave transmitter must be PPM (Pulse Position
Modulation) and must be equipped with a DSC
(Direct Servo Control) or trainer jack. If the slave
transmitter is PPM/PCM selectable, select PPM. The
master transmitter can be PCM or PPM.
2.Plug the trainer cord (optional part #JRPA130) into
each transmitter's DSC/Trainer jack.
3. Switch the master transmitter on. Do not switch
on the slave transmitter; it is only necessary to have
the master transmitter on.
Note: If the master transmitter is the X-378,
the LCD will indicate "TRINR" (Trainer
Master) and will list the channels that have
been programmed when the power switch is on.
Note: Each transmitter will appear to be on,
but neither is actually transmitting at this time.
Example of normal display screen indicating
trainer master with the normal (N) trainer
function selected
4.Pull the trainer switch toward you to transfer
control to the slave. Releasing the switch
automatically reverts to the master transmitter.
5.Be sure the slave transmitter's servo reversing, dual
rates, end-point adjustment and trims are identical
to the master transmitter. This can be checked by
pulling the trainer switch toward you. If the control
surfaces move, adjust the slave transmitter until the
trainer switch can be activated without a change of
the control surface position.
Use of the Programmable Trainer Function
In this mode, the master may assign functions to the
student one at a time to make learning to fly easier.
For example, the master may assign the slave aileron
and elevator. Then, when the trainer switch is
activated (pulled forward), the slave has control of
aileron and elevator only while the master retains
control of throttle and rudder.
Note: When all channels are set to master,
the Trainer System becomes Normal.
Use of the Normal Trainer System
In this mode, all functions are switched from the
master to the slave using the trainer switch. This is
the Normal mode–no function setup is necessary to
activate this system.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
61
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 62
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
6.16
TIMER FUNCTION
The X-378 offers two separate types of Timer
functions: Countdown and Stopwatch.
trainer switch will not operate the timer start/stop
function, and the timer function cannot be used.
The Countdown Timer time is input in 10-second
intervals up to 35 minutes. The timer can be set for
each individual model and retained in the memory
for each model. Once the Timer function has been
activated, it can be started and stopped from the
Normal display screen using the Channel key. It can
also be started and stopped using the snap
roll/trainer button located at the front right portion
of the transmitter. When the X-378 is being used as
the master transmitter in the Training function the
Note: In the Countdown mode, the transmitter
will beep three times at :30 seconds, two times
at :20 seconds, and beep one time every
second from :10 to 0. At zero there will be a
continuous tone for 1 second and then the
timer will begin counting up with a (+)
indication to the left of the time value.
When used as the Stopwatch, the timer will count up
to 44 minutes 59 seconds, at which time it will reset
to zero and continue to count.
Timer option selected
Timer value set
Servo Reversing
Trainer Function
62
Press the (+) or (=)
Press Channel to
keys to increase of
select timer
options (off, down decrease the time
timer, stop watch). value.
Press Clear to reset the
Down timer value to the
factory default position
(10:00).
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 63
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane
Accessing the Timer Functions
1.Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2.Press the Down and Channel keys
simultaneously to enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until "TIMER" is
displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel Key to select the desired timer
option (Off, Down-Timer, Stopwatch)
Setting the Down-Timer value
Pressing the (+) key will change the display to
:10 each time the (+) is pressed, and the value will
increase in 10-second intervals up to 59:50
minutes. Pressing the Clear key will reset the
Countdown Timer to the factory default 10:00
minute value.
Indicates current timer
value selected
UP
To access the Servo
Reversing function,
press the Up key.
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
DN
To access
the Trainer
function,
press the
Down key.
CH
Press the Channel key
to start/stop the timer.
CLR
Press the Clear key to reset to
the assigned timer value.
To exit the Timer function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
63
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 64
CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Airplane
7.1
PROGRAMMABLE MIXING OPTIONS
1. "Super" Mix
If 100% of mixing value is not enough, you can use a
second mix and mix more (or less, as the case may
be) into the original mix. For example: You may want
to mix the throttle channel to itself and remove the
throttle for certain aerobatic maneuvers. If -100% is
not enough, simply use an additional programmable
mix (same channels, Offset, mixing switch
assignment, etc.) and take the throttle out further.
2. Slow -Speed for Landing Approach
This mix slows down the engine to further ease the
landing. This mix can also be used for an engine that
idles too "hot" on the ground.
Connections and Mixing Operations
• Utilize one mix-to-mix throttle - throttle
(THRO-THRO)
• Slightly adjust the mixing value
percentage for the low throttle stick
position, -5% for example.
• For the mixing operator switch, it is
recommended that you use the land (LAND).
Selecting the LAND allows you to employ
landing operations simultaneously.
• To achieve the final mixing percentage, fly your
aircraft and make adjustments as necessary.
Note: By using the Programmable Mix 5 or 6
Functions, a Y-harness is not necessary. This
mix also corrects for the common problems
of asymmetrical elevator control.
Connections and Mixing Operations
• Connect the elevator servos to the elevator
(ELEV) and Auxiliary 2 (AUX 2) channels
respectively.
• Use one of your program mixes (5 or 6 only), and
mix elevator to AUX 2.
Note: Only mixes 5 and 6 offer the Trim Include
Mixing function and it is necessary that the
Digital trims also affect the slave channel (AUX
2) for this type of mixing.
With this special mix, your elevator servos function
exactly the same as if only one elevator servo were
used. Fine adjustments for servo direction and
neutral points should be made using Servo
Reversing and Sub-Trim functions.
Note: Each servo's adjustments are to be
made individually.
For Travel Adjustment values, use the Travel-Adjust
function.
3. Dual-Elevator Servo Operations
This is most applicable in quarter scale aircraft
where one servo is not enough for the elevator
controls.
64
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 65
CHAPTER 8: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Airplane
X-378 MANUAL Airplane
65
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 66
SECTION III • CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter
1.1
CONTROL IDENTIFICATION AND LOCATION
Helicopter Version Transmitter
Flight Mode
Switch
Elevator DR
Switch
Trainer/Timer
Throttle Cut
Handle
Hover Pitch
Lever
TX Antenna
Hover Throttle
Lever
Gear/Inverted
On/Off
Switch
Aileron D/R
Switch
AUX2/Hold
Rudder D/R
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
Digital Throttle
Trim Lever
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Rudder/Throttle
Control/Stick
Neck Strap Eyelet
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Increase
Decrease
Programming
Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
Channel Key
Clear Key
LCD Display
1.2
RECEIVER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
66
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
Gear Channel
Auxiliary 1 Channel (Pitch)
Auxiliary 2 Channel (Gyro Sensitivity)
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:07 PM
Page 67
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter
Helicopter Version Transmitter Airplane Mode
AUX 2
Lever
Gear
Switch
Elevator DR
Switch
Snap Roll/Timer/
Trainer Button
Flap
Lever
Aileron D/R Switch
Flap Mixing
Switch
Rudder D/R Switch
On/Off
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
Digital Throttle
Trim Lever
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Rudder/Throttle
Control/Stick
Neck Strap Eyelet
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Increase/Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
LCD Display
Channel Key
Clear Key
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
5.
6.
7.
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
Gear Channel
Auxiliary 1 Channel (Flap)
Auxiliary 2 Channel (Spoiler)
Helicopter Version Transmitter–Glider Mode
Flap
Lever
Crow
Switch
Elevator DR
Switch
Flap Trim
Lever
Timer Trainer
Button
Aileron D/R Switch
Flapperon
AUX2/Hold Rudder
D/R Switch
On/Off
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
Spoiler
Trim Lever
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Spoiler/Rudder
Control/Stick
Neck Strap Eyelet
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Increase/Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
LCD Display
Channel Key
Clear Key
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
5.
GEAR
6.
AUX 1
7.
AUX 2
Gear Channel
(Left Aileron Channel–AIL 2)
Auxiliary 1 Channel
(Left Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)
Auxiliary 2 Channel
(Right Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)
67
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 68
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter
1.3
TRANSMITTER REAR
Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice
The Federal Communications Commission (FFC) requires that
changes in transmitter frequency must be performed only by an
authorized service technician (Horizon Service Center). Any
transmitter frequency change made by non-certified technician
may result in a violation of the FCC rules.
TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL
DSC/ TRAINER JACK
CHARGING JACK FOR NI-CD
BATTERY ONLY (8N-550)
THROTTLE TENSION SCREW
ELEVATOR TENSION SCREW
RUDDER TENSION SCREW
AILERON TENSION SCREW
68
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 69
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter
1.4
CONTROL STICK LENGTH ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the stick length, use the 2mm Allen wrench
(supplied with your X-378 transmitter) to unlock the
set screw. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to
loosen the screw. Then, turn the stick clockwise to
shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen. After the
control stick length has been adjusted to suit your
flying style, tighten the 2mm set screw. If you desire
longer sticks, JR offers a thicker stick (JRPA047) that
is approximately one inch longer than the standard
stick. This stick, crafted from bar stock aluminum, is
available at your local JR dealer.
1.5
LOOSEN
TIGHTEN
CONTROL STICK TENSION ADJUSTMENT
Remove the Ni-Cd battery and six transmitter back
screws as shown at previous page. Remove the
transmitter back, being careful not to cause damage
to any components.
1.6
SET SCREW
Adjust each screw for desired tension (counterclockwise to loosen stick feel; clockwise to tighten
stick feel). When adjusting the throttle ratchet
tension, make sure that the adjusting screw does not
touch the PC board after adjustment is complete.
DIRECT SERVO CONTROL (DSC)
For proper DSC hook-up and operation:
1. Leave the transmitter power switch in the Off
position. The transmitter will not transmit any radio
frequency (RF) in this position.
2. Plug the (supplied) DSC cord into the DSC port in
the rear of the transmitter.
3. The encoder section of the transmitter will now be
operational and the LCD display will be lit.
4. Plug the other end of the DSC Cord into the receiver
charge receptacle. Turn the switch harness to the On
position.
2. The DSC function allows you to make final
adjustments to your airplane without transmitting
any radio signals. Therefore, if another pilot is flying
on your frequency, you can still adjust your aircraft
and not interfere with the other pilot’s aircraft.
Note: Under no circumstances should you
attempt to fly your aircraft with the DSC cord
plugged in! This function is for benchchecking your model only.
A—Charge Cord/DSC Receptacle
B—Switch Harness Lead
C—Charger/DCS Cord
Note: When you install the charging jack, be
sure to hook the charging jack receptacle
securely into the switch harness charge cord.
Why you should use the DSC function:
1. The DSC enables you to check the control surfaces
of your aircraft without drawing the fully operational
200mAh from your transmitter battery pack. Instead,
you will only draw 70mAh when using the DSC
function.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
69
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 70
CHAPTER 1: CONNECTIONS • Helicopter
1.7
NECK STRAP ATTACHMENT
An eyelet is provided on the face of the XP-378
transmitter that allows you to connect a Neck Strap
(JRPA023). This hook has been positioned so that
your transmitter has the best possible balance when
you use the neck strap.
1.8
BASE LOADED ADJUSTMENT
An optional base-loaded antenna is available for use
with the X-378 transmitter. It is considerably shorter
than the standard antenna. However, the base
loaded antenna cannot be collapsed for storage in
the side of the transmitter. You must also use an
1.9
adaptor (JRPA156) to attach the antenna to your
X-378. The Base Loaded Antenna (JRPA155) is made
of a flexible coil and is covered with a soft plastic
material. Your range will not be affected when using
the base loaded antenna.
FREQUENCY NOTES/AIRCRAFT ONLY FREQUENCIES
The X-378 transmitter employs a plug-in crystal for
transmitter that is glued in place at the time of
shipment. Per FCC regulation, the transmitter crystal
should only be changed by a certified technician.
Changing of the transmitter crystal by a non
authorized technician could result in a violation of
FCC rules.
The X-378 can transmit in either Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM) or Pulse Position Modulation
(PPM, commonly referred to as FM).
Be certain to observe the following guidelines:
1. Do not operate your transmitter when another
transmitter is using the same frequency, regardless
of whether the second transmitter is PCM, PPM (FM)
or AM. You can never operate two transmitters on
the same frequency simultaneously without causing
interference to both receivers and crashing both
aircraft.
70
Note: Double-check to ensure that the neck
strap is securely fastened to the transmitter.
2. For operation of your X-378 with additional
receivers, you should refer to the receiver
compatibility chart. The chart is located in the
Modulation Selection Section of this manual.
Aircraft-Only Frequencies
JR RF modules and receivers are available in 72MHz
frequencies in the United States for use with model
aircraft. Employing 72MHz frequencies does not
require a special operator’s license from the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC).
* A chart for all available frequencies is located
on page 185 of this manual.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 71
CHAPTER 2: CONNECTIONS • Helicopter
2.1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
It is extremely important that your radio system be
correctly installed in your model. Here are a few
suggestions on the installation of your JR equipment:
The brass bushings are pushed from the bottom up
in the rubber grommets. When the servo screw is
tightened securely, it provides the proper security as
well as the proper vibration isolation for your servo.
3. The servos must be able to move freely over their
entire range of travel. Make sure that the control
linkages do not bind or impede the movement of any
of the servos.
4. Mount all switches away from the engine exhaust
and away from any high vibration areas. Make sure
the switch operates freely and is able to operate over
its full travel.
5. Mount the receiver antenna firmly to the airplane
to ensure that it will not become entangled in the
propeller or control surfaces.
1. Wrap the receiver in protective foam rubber that is
no less than 3/8 inch thick. Secure the foam to the
receiver with #64 rubber bands. This protects the
receiver in the event of a crash or a very hard
landing.
2. The servos should be mounted using rubber
grommets and brass bushings to isolate them from
vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws;
this will negate the vibration absorption effect of the
rubber grommets. The diagram
to the right will assist you in
properly mounting
your servo.
2.2
CONNECTIONS
®
4N600
RECEIVER BATTERY 4N-1000
4.8V 600mAh
JAPAN REMOTE CONTROL CO., LTD.
DELUXE SWITCH HARNESS
(JRPA0001)
ON
OFF
BATTERY
CHARGECORD OR
D.S.C. RECEPTACLE
(JRPS024)
B AT T
CHARGECORD OR D.S.C.
D.S.C.-(JRPA132)
CHARGER-(JRPC221)
7 CH 72MHz FM SLIMLINE
RECEIVER
ABC&W INTERFERENCE
PROTECTION SYSTEM
AUX1
GEAR
RUDD
AUX 2
AUXILIARY 1/PITCH
GEAR
RUDDER
ELEV
AILE
ELEVATOR
THRO
AILERON
R700 RECEIVER
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
THROTTLE
71
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 72
CHAPTER 3: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Helicopter
KEY INPUT AND DISPLAY
The Function Selection keys are used to move up and
down through the functions.The Channel key is used
to advance the channel or function selected. The
Increase and Decrease keys are used to make changes in
the selected functions.
INCREASE
UP
DECREASE
DOWN
Press both keys at the
same time to enter or
exit the function mode.
CHANNEL
CLEAR/STORE
Hereafter, explanation of all functions in this manual
will use the following designations to indicate
pressing individual keys:
UP
DN
CH
UP
DOWN
CHANNEL
CLR
INCREASE
DECREASE
CLEAR
CHAPTER 4: ALARM AND ERROR DISPLAY • Helicopter
4.1
BATTERY ALARM AND DISPLAY
When the transmitter voltage drops below 9.0-volts
DC, the display flashes “BATT” and an alarm sounds
4.2
BACKUP ERROR DISPLAY
All preprogrammed data is protected by a five-year
lithium battery that guards against main transmitter
battery failure. Should the lithium battery fail, the
display will indicate ERR1 regardless of the position
of the On/Off switch. If this occurs, it will be
necessary to replace the battery and reprogram all
data. All transmitter programs will return to the
factory default settings, and the data you have input
will be lost. When it becomes necessary to replace
the lithium back-up battery, contact JR Horizon
Service Center. Due to the possibility of extensive
72
seven times. If you are flying when this occurs, land
immediately.
damage caused by improper removal or replacement,
only JR Horizon Service Center is authorized to make
this change.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 73
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.1
NORMAL DISPLAY
When the power switch is in the On position, the
display will read as follows:
Modulation Type Model Type
Model Number
Flight Mode
Throttle Trim
Elevator Trim
Model Name
Rudder Trim
Aileron Trim
To enter the System mode, press simultaneously then
turn on the power switch. To enter the Function model,
turn on the power switch, then press simultaneously.
In the Timer mode, press the Channel key to start/stop
the timer, and press the Clear key to reset the timer.
5.2
DIRECT ACCESS DIGITAL TRIMS
The X-378 is equipped with a Direct Access Digital
Trim Value function. When at the normal display, if a
digital trim lever is moved, the screen will
automatically change to show the current trim value
for the channel being adjusted. When the trim is
returned to center, the screen will change back to the
normal display screen after a few seconds.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Displays the current trim value for the
channel being adjusted
73
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 74
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.3
SYSTEM MODE
To enter the System mode, press the Up and Down
keys simultaneously, then turn the power switch to
the on position. The display will show the last active
program. Pressing either the Up or Down key then
scrolls through the functions one by one, according
to the system mode flowchart shown below. Once
the appropriate function is displayed, changes can
be made by pressing the (+) or (-) keys.
System Mode Flowchart
Information pertaining to each function is explained
on the page listed next to the function name.
Functions will appear in the same order they are
shown on this chart.
Model Selection pg. 75
Model Name Entry pg. 77
Model Type pg. 78
Data Reset pg. 79
Modulation Selection pg. 80
Data Transfer pg. 81
Trim Step pg. 84
Throttle-Cut Switch
Activation pg. 85
AUX 2 Channel
Input Selection pg. 86
Swashplate Type pg. 87
Accessing the System Mode
1. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously.
2. Move the power switch to the On (upper) position.
3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the
menu and access the applicable function.
74
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 75
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.4
MODEL SELECTION/MODEL COPY SELECT
The X-378 system offers memory for eight completely
separate models. Therefore, it is possible to have a
mixture of helicopter, airplane and glider setups
retained in memory. It is also recommended that the
Model Name Entry function be used in conjunction
with each model setup. Another very useful function
of the Model Selection function is the ability to set
one aircraft up several different ways. This is helpful
when multi-task performance is desired.
“Model” flashing indicates
Model Select Function
Current Model Name
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Name Entry
Swashplate
Mixing
Copy
Selection
Model Selection
Accessing the Model Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Model should be flashing on the right top portion
of the LCD. If not, press the Up or Down key until
“Model” is displayed and flashing.
3. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will select among each
of the eight models available. Notice that as each
model is selected, its name appears in the left
portion of the LCD.
4. To access the Copy Selection function, press the
Channel key.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
5. To access the Model Name Entry function, press
the Up key.
6. Once the desired model is displayed on the left,
pressing the Up and Down keys simultaneously will exit
the Model Selection function and establish the model
displayed as the new current model.
Note: When changing from one model type to
another, it is not necessary to use the Type
Selection function. This is done automatically
by the computer.
75
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 76
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
Model Copy Select
The Copy Selection function enables you to copy all
of the settings of the current model to another
model within the same transmitter. This is very
useful when setting up one aircraft several different
ways or when trying an alternative setup of your
current model.
Model number to
be copied
Model number
to be copied to
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Naming
Spoiler Channel
Input Select
Press at Model
Select function
to access Copy
function.
Press Increase or
Decrease to select
model number to
be copied to.
Press Clear to copy current
model to model number
shown at the bottom of the
LCD screen.
Accessing the Copy Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move
the transmitter’s power switch to the On position.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “Model”
appears flashing on the top right side of the LCD.
3. The number that appears below the flashing
“Model” is the current model. This is important to
note, as only the current model will be the copied or
“from” model. Therefore, it is imperative to retrieve
the proper current model prior to initiating the copy
sequence. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select
the desired model to be copied.
4. Next, press the Channel key once. The word “Copy”
will appear at the top left of the screen indicating
that the Copy function has been selected.
5. The large number (1-8) at the bottom center of the
LCD indicate the accepting model.
6. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the
accepting model number.
no longer want to retain in your transmitter’s
memory. Once the copying process has been
completed, the information of the accepting
model is lost and the current model is input as
the new data.
7. Once the desired accepting model is selected,
press the Clear key to complete the Copy Selection
function. The model number at the bottom of the
screen will flash several times indicating that the
model copy function was successful. The “from”
(template) model’s name and data will now replace
that of the accepting model.
8. To access the Spoiler Channel Input Select
function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Model Naming function, press the
Up key.
10. To exit the Copy Selection function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: Always make sure that the accepting
model is either free of input or one which you
76
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 77
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.5
MODEL NAME ENTRY
The X-378 allows a 3-digit name to be input for each
of the eight models available. The current model will
be displayed in the Normal display when the timer is
not active. You may also find this useful to identify
different aircraft setups.
Flashing first digit
indicates Model
Naming function and
current character to
be changed
UP
Model number
DN
CH
CLR
Model Type
Model
Select
Select
Characters
Next
Digit
Clear Character
Accessing the Model Name Entry Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On (upper) position to enter
the Model Setup mode.
2. Use the Model Selection function to select the
model you want to name. (Please refer to the Model
Selection section at this time.)
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the first digit
of the model to be named is flashing on the left
portion of the LCD.
4. The current name will be displayed in the left
portion of the LCD. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will
select the first alphanumeric character.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Note: The character being selected will flash.
5. Press the Channel key to advance the character
selection to the next character.
6. Repeat this procedure until all three characters are
selected.
7. To access the Model Selection function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Type Selection function, press the Up
key.
9. To exit the Model Name Entry function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
77
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 78
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.6
MODEL TYPE SELECTION
The X-378 is capable of performing as a helicopter,
airplane or glider radio with full functions for each.
Model Type
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Data Reset
Model Naming
Change model
type
Accessing the Type Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down keys until “Acro,” “Heli,”
or “Glid” is displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
3. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the
type of model.
4. To access the Model Name Entry function, press
the Down key.
5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Up key.
6. To exit the Type Selection function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
78
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 79
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE• Helicopter
5.7
DATA RESET
The Data Reset function permits you to reset all the
functions and settings for the current model to
factory conditions. Resetting does not affect the data
already programmed for other models. Be sure to
confirm that you need to reset the data of the
currently indicated model in order to prevent
accidental loss of your valuable data.
Model number to be reset
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Modulation Select
Model Type
Press to data reset
current model.
Accessing the Data Reset Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Press the Up or Down key until “RESET” appears in
the center of the LCD display. Check the number at
the right side of the display to be sure the model
selected is the model you want to reset.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
3. To reset data, press the Clear key.
4. To access the Type Selection function, press the
Down key.
5. To access the Modulation Selection function, press
the Up key.
6. To exit the Data Reset function, press both the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
79
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 80
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.8
MODULATION SELECT
The Modulation Selection function enables your
X-378 to transmit to a variety of JR receivers that are
already, or may soon be, in existence. You can select
from either of two types of PCM, Z-PCM or S-PCM,
depending on the Central Processing Unit (CPU)
within your receiver or from linear PPM (Pulse
Position Modulation [FM]).
Refer to the receiver compatibility chart below for
the correct modulation.
Modulation
Data Transfer
Change
modulation
Data Reset
Reset to SPCM
modulation
Accessing the Modulation Select Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move
the power switch to the On position to access the
System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPCM,”
“ZPCM,” or “PPM” appears at the top of the LCD.
3. To change among the modulation types, press
either the (+) or (-) keys.
4. Pressing the Clear key will also reset the modulation
selection to the factory preset S-PCM.
5. To access the Data Reset function, press the
Down key.
6. To access the Data Transfer function, press the
Up key.
7. To exit the Modulation Selection function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: When the Data Reset function is used,
the X-378 retains the current modulation
selected for each model. This means that the
modulation type does not change.
Note: In the normal display, the selected
modulation type will appear in the middle of
the LCD.
TX Modulation
Compatible Receivers
# of Channels &
Brief Description
TX Modulation
Compatible Receivers
PPM
PPM
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM
PPM
PPM
NER-226
NER-228
NER-327x
NER-527x
NER-529x
NER-549
NER-600
NER-610M
NER-700M
6 (micro)
7 (micro)
9 (micro)
Z-PCM
Z-PCM
NER-236
NER-627XZ or
627 “G” series
NER-J329P
NER-910XZ
NER-955
NER-D945
NER-649S
80
Z-PCM
Z-PCM
S-PCM
S-PCM
S-PCM
# of Channels &
Brief Description
6 (micro)
10
10
10
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 81
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.9
DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION
The X-378’s Data Transfer function allows for a model
from one X-378 transmitter to be sent to another
X-378 transmitter by using a JR Trainer Cord
(JRPA130 sold separately).
Transmit Mode
Trim Step
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Transmitting Transmitter: It will first be necessary
to select the desired model (1-8) to b transferred to
the receiving transmitter. Access the Model Select
function and select the desired model number to be
transferred (See section 5.4 for information)
Indicates that the
DSC cord needs to
be inserted, and TX
power switch needs
to be turned off
Modulation
Select
Press to select Transmit (TX) or
Receive (RX ) modes.
81
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 82
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
Transfer Procedure
1. Both transmitters: With the main power switch off,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
while turning the power switch on to enter the
System mode. The word “TXDSC” will be displayed
and flashing.
2. Press the Channel key to select Transmit (TXDSC) or
Receive (RXDSC) modes.
3. Insert the trainer cord into each transmitter, the
letters DSC will be removed from the screen.
4. Turn off the power switch on each transmitter. The
screen will then change to read either “TXOUT” or
“RXSEL”, depending if transmit or receive modes
were selected.
Note: It is also possible to access the Data
Transfer function as follows:
Model number and
program to be
transmitted (sent)
Transmitting condition
(0% not sent, 100%
transfer complete)
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Trim Step
Modulation
Select
Press Channel to
select Transmit
(TX) or Receive
(RX) modes.
1. With the main TX power switch off, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously while inserting the
trainer cord into the DSC jack of both transmitters.
(The transmitters will now be in System mode
automatically)
2. Press the Channel key to select transmit (TX) or
receive (RX) modes.
3. Both transmitters: In the System mode, press the
Up or Down keys until the words “TXOUT” appears on
the screen. This is the Data Transfer program.
4. Receiving Mode Transmitter (TX to receive
programming): Press the Channel key until the screen
82
Press Clear to begin transmit
or receive procedure.
reads “RXSEL.” The word “MODEL” will begin
flashing at the top right portion of the LCD directly
over the current model number selected.
5. Select the receiving model number by pressing the
(+) and (-) keys.
Transmitting Data
6. Press the Clear key to activate the receiving standby mode. The word “RX IN” will now be indicated on
the screen.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 83
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
“MODEL” flashing indicates
current receiving model
number can be selected
using the (+) or (-) keys
Indicates receiving condition (0%
not started, 100% completed)
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Trim Step
Modulation Select
Press Channel
to select
Transmit or
receive modes.
Press the (+) or (-) keys to select
model number to receive program
(1-8) from sending transmitter.
The receiving transmitter must be in this Standby
mode before the sending transmitter’s Clear key is
pressed, or the date will not be transferred
successfully.
Press the Clear key to put the
receiving transmitter into Standby
mode. The screen will display “RX IN”.
Current receiving condition (0% not
started, 100% completed)
8. Transmitting mode transmitter (TX with program
to be sent): Press the Clear key to start transmitting
data. If the data transfer was successful, both
transmitters will indicate the value 100% on the
display when the transmitting is complete.
If there is a data receiving error during transmitting,
the counter will stop. At this time, press the Clear key
to stop the receiving function. If there is any failure
of transferring, the display will appear as follows:
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
When the receiving counter is stopped or you see
“ERROR” indicated, check the trainer cord
connection and condition and try again. Be sure that
the receiving Mode transmitter is in standby
condition first. Then on the transmitting transmitter
press the Clear key to start transmitting.
Note: The Data Transfer function will not
work when the battery alarm is flashing.
83
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 84
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.10
TRIM STEP
The Trim Step function allows the user to increase or
decrease the coarseness of the servo movement as
compared to the steps or beeps of the digital trim.
The total servo trim movement remains the same,
(approx. 30degree) regardless of the trim step rate
selected(1~10). The factory default setting for the
trim step function is 4, which means that for each
UP
DN
step (beep) of the digital trim, the servo will move in
digital increments of 4. In other words, if a finer trip
step value of 1 is selected, the servo will move in a
digital increment of 1 for each step (beep) of the
digital trim. If a more coarse trim value of 10 is
selected, the servo will more in a digital increment of
10 for each step (beep) of the digital trim lever.
CH
CLR
Throttle Cut
Data Transfer
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase or decrease
the trim step rate.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default 4 position.
Press Channel to
select channel to
be adjusted
(Throttle, Aileron,
Elevator, Hover
Pitch Lever, Hover
Throttle Lever).
84
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 85
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.11
THROTTLE CUT SWITCH ACTIVATION
This is the function to assign Throttle Cut switch to
the push button located on upper front of the
transmitter. In the System mode, select the Throttle
Cut Switch function (CUT) by using Up or Down keys,
and press (+) or (-) keys to select the function on or
UP
DN
off. The Throttle Cut function is designed to return
the throttle trim to the lowest position instantly and
keep this position while the button is pressed. This
feature is used to “cut” or stop the engine without
changing the position of digital throttle trim.
CH
CLR
AUX 2 Switch Selection
Trim Step
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to turn the
Throttle Cut function
on and off.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory off position.
85
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 86
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.12
AUX2/GEAR FUNCTION SELECT
The AUX 2/Gear channel input selection function
allows you to select which switch, AUX 2 or Flight
mode, will activate the AUX 2 function, as well as
activating or inhibiting the Gear switch.If you use the
AUX 2 function for the gyro sensitivity adjustment,
you can change the rudder dual rate and the gyro
sensitivity at the same time via the Flight mode
switch. Conversely, if the AUX 2 switch is used, the
gyro sensitivity is changed when the AUX 2 switch is
activated.
AUX 2 function selection
Gear switch activation
Swashplate Type
Throttle Cut
Select
Gear switch
activation
Press Increase
or Decrease to
change switch
options.
Press Clear to reset
to factory settings.
Accessing the AUX 2 Channel Input Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the on position to enter the
System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “AUX2” is
displayed in the center portion of the LCD.
3. Pressing either the Increase or Decrease keys will
change the activation switch from the AUX 2 switch
to the Flight mode.
4. Pressing the Clear key will reset the AUX 2
activation switch to the AUX 2 switch.
5. Pressing the Channel key will select the Gear
channel switch activation.
86
6. Pressing either the increase or decrease keys will
change the switch assignment from INH to Act.
7. Pressing the Clear key will rest the Gear switch to
the ACT (Active) position.
5. To access the Throttle Cut switch function, press
the Down key.
6. To access the Swashplate Type function, press the
Up key.
7. To exit the AUX 2/Gear channel input selection
function, press the Down and Channel keys
simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 87
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter
5.13
SWASHPLATE TYPE
The Swashplate Mixing function enables the X-378
system to operate many different types of swashplate
control systems, including 3 versions of CCPM.
Note: Although the X-378 Swashplate Mixing
Type screen displays 4SERV 90 CCPM mixing,
this function is actually 3 Servo/90° CCPM
mixing, and cannot be used with current 4
Servo/90° CCPM models.
The Swashplate options are:
1 Servo: Non-CCPM, standard mixing type helicopter.
2 Servo/180° CCPM
3 Servo/120° CCPM (JR style, most popular)
3 Servo/90° CCPM
Model Select
Press the + or - keys to select the
desired Swashplate Mixing type.
AUX2 Function
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default setting.
Accessing the Swashplate Type Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the ON position to enter the
system mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until SWASH is
displayed in the left center portion of the LCD.
3. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to change the
Swashplate type.
4. Pressing the Clear key will reset the Swashplate
Type to the Normal position.
5. Pressing the Channel key will select the Gear
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Channel switch activation.
6. Pressing the Clear key will rest the Swashplate Type
to the factory default (Normal) position.
7. To access the AUX2 Switch function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Model Select function, press the
Up key.
8. To exit the Swashplate Type function , press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
87
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 88
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.1
FUNCTION MODE
To enter the Function mode, switch the transmitter
power switch to the On position. Press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously, and the display will
show the last active program. Pressing either the Up
or Down key then scrolls through the functions one by
one, according to the Function Mode Flowchart
shown on the right. Once the appropriate function is
displayed, changes can be made by pressing the (+)
or (-) keys. To select another channel of a particular
function, press the Channel key. If you transfer to a
different function that is channel selectable, the
display will show the same channel. For example, if
you are adjusting the dual rate of the elevator and
you change to the Exponential function, the channel
remains elevator. The Function mode is the most
often used system to input data.
Function Mode Flowchart
Information pertaining to each function is explained
on the page listed next to the function name.
Functions will appear in the same order they are
shown on this chart.
Servo
Reversing pg.87
Dual-Rate pg.90
Exponential pg.92
Sub-Trim pg.93
Travel Adjust pg.94
CCPM Mixing (only
when CCPM is
selected in System
Mode) pg.94
Throttle Hold pg.95
Throttle Curves
(3) pg.98
Pitch Curves
(4) pg.101
Accessing the Function Mode
1. Move the power switch to the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the
menu and access the applicable function.
Inverted Switch
pg.103
Revolution
Mixing pg.104
Gyro Gain
Function pg.106
Programmable
Mixing 1-3 pg.110
Fail-Safe (only visible
when PCM Modulation
is selected) pg.114
Trainer Function
pg.117
Timer Function
pg.119
88
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 89
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.2
SERVO REVERSING
The Reverse Switch function is an electronic means
of reversing the throw of a given channel (servo). All
seven channels of the X-378 offer reversible servo
direction. This will ease setup during the servo
installation into your aircraft.
Channel to be adjusted
UP
Dual-Rate
Function
Timer
Function
DN
CH
CLR
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to change the
servo direction.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory normal direction.
Press Channel to
change to the
desired channel to
be adjusted.
Accessing the Reverse Switch Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “REV.”
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Using your transmitter’s control sticks, switches
and potentiometers, move the control surfaces of
your aircraft. Note the travel direction of each of the
corresponding control surfaces.
5. After you have determined which channel(s) need
to have the throw directions reversed, use the
Channel key to call up the appropriate channel.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
6. Press either the (+) or (-) keys to change the travel
direction of the servo. Pressing the Clear key returns
the travel direction to normal.
7. You can observe the change in the travel direction
by moving the appropriate control at this time.
8. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Reverse Switch function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
89
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 90
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.3
DUAL RATES
Dual rates are available for the aileron, elevator and
rudder channels of your R/C aircraft. There is also an
automatic dual rate setting to link your aileron,
elevator, and rudder dual rates to the flight model
switch. This Automatic Dual-Rate function is
discussed in a separate section that follows. Dual
rates may be defined as the ability to vary the travel
or throw rate of a servo from a switch. Due to the
differing travel rates, you will find that the sensitivity
of the control either increases or decreases
accordingly. A higher rate or travel yields a higher
overall sensitivity. You may find it easier to think of
the Dual-Rate function as double-rates or halfrates.The Dual-Rate function works in conjunction
with the Exponential function to allow you to
precisely tailor your control throws. You may want to
consult the section defining exponential for further
information.
D/R switch
position (0 or 1)
Channel to be
adjusted
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Exponential
Servo
Reversing
Press (+) or (-) to
increase or decrease
D/R values.
Press Clear to
reset to factory
default settings
(100%).
Press Channel to
select Aileron,
Elevator, Rudder,
or Auto D/R to be
adjusted.
The amount of travel is adjustable from 0-125% in 1%
increments. The factory setting, or default value, for
both the 0 and 1 switch positions is 100%. Either
switch position may be selected as the low or high
rate by placing the switch in the desired position and
adjusting the value accordingly.
Accessing the Dual Rate Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the on
position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “D/R”
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
(aileron, elevator, rudder or automatic dual rates)
appears.
5. Select the switch position for which you want to
adjust the rate. The number to the upper right of the
current rate value on the display indicates the
current position of the dual rate switch for the
90
channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or a 1 will
be shown, corresponding to the position of the
switch. To select the opposite switch position, move
the appropriate dual rate switch to the opposite
position. The number that appears above the current
rate value reflects the change.
6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch
position that you have just selected. To decrease the
throw rate, press the (-) key. To increase the throw
rate, press the (+) key. As stated previously, the
adjustable rate is from 0-125% for each switch
position and channel.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 91
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Accessing the Dual Rate Function (continued)
Note: You can observe the servo changes
by moving the respective stick while increasing
or decreasing the values. The control changes
accordingly. To clear the dual rate for the
respective channel and switch position,
press the Clear key. After the dual rates have
been dialed in to your satisfaction, we
suggest that you begin to adjust the
exponential values. Refer to the Exponential
section for more information.
7. To access the Servo Reversing function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Exponential function, press the
Up key.
9. To exit the Dual-Rate function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
Automatic Dual Rate
If the Automatic Dual-Rate function AUTO is active
(on) when switching the flight mode switch, aileron,
elevator and rudder channel Dual-Rate values are
switched to preset values settled by position 1.
Flight mode position
to be adjusted
Off or On
Exponential
Servo
Reversing
Press Clear to return to the
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to turn the Auto factory default setting (off).
D/R function on or off.
Press Channel to
select the desired
flight mode to
adjust (1,2 or HO).
To access this function, move to the D/R (Dual-Rate)
screen, and press the Channel button until the word
“AUTO” appears at the top center of the screen, with a
small box with the number 1 to the far left. This would
indicate the Auto D/R function for Flight mode 1.
Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the function on or off.
Repeat this procedure for flight modes 2 and
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Hold (HO).To confirm that the Auto D/R is
functioning, simply move the flight mode switch
while at any of the normal D/R channel screens. If
the Auto D/R is functioning, the screen will indicate
“D/RAT“, and the D/R switch position at the far right
of the screen will change from 0 to 1 as the switch
is moved.
91
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 92
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.4
EXPONENTIAL
Programmable exponential adjustments are offered
on the aileron, elevator, and rudder channels of your
R/C aircraft. Exponential is a function that allows you
to tailor the response rate of the stick controls. The
purpose of exponential is to reduce the sensitivity in
the middle portion of stick movement, while still
allowing full travel at the end of the stick movement.
In other words, the end result (travel) remains the
same, although exponential changes the rate at
which it achieves this travel.
The adjustable range of the Exponential Function is
from 0-100%. Zero percent (0%) is linear stick control
which means that the response rate is equal
throughout the stick control. 100% is full
exponential. The larger the exponential value, the
less servo action or sensitivity you will notice around
the neutral setting.
Note: The Exponential function operates in
conjunction with the Dual-Rate function. It is
imperative to understand the Dual-Rate
function prior to adjusting the exponential
values. Exponential may be selected for either
the high or low rate or both.
Dual-Rate switch
position to be
adjusted
Channel
to be adjusted
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Sub-Trim Function
Dual-Rate
Function
Press to select Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,
or AUTO position to be adjusted.
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
Increase or decrease the
Exponential values, or to
activate or inhibit the
Exponential function in the
Auto Dual-Rate modes.
Press Clear to reset
values to the factory
default position.
Accessing the Exponential Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
access the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “EXP” (Exponential) appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
(aileron, elevator, rudder or AUTO) appears.
5. Select the switch position for which you want to
adjust the exponential rate. The number directly
above the exponential value on the display indicates
the current position of the dual rate switch for the
channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or 1 will be
shown, corresponding to the position of the switch.
To select the opposite switch position, move the
appropriate Dual-Rate or Flight mode switch to the
opposite position. The number that appears directly
92
above the Exponential value will reflect the change.
6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch
position that you have just selected. To increase the
exponential rate, press the (+) key. As stated
previously, the adjustable rate is from linear (0%)
to100% for each switch position and channel.
Note: Exponential is an acquired feel. As such, it
may take several test flights to achieve the proper
amount of exponential that fits your flying style.
8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Exponential Function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 93
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.5
SUB-TRIM
The Sub-Trim Adjustment function allows you to
electronically fine-tune the centering of your servos.
Individually adjustable for all seven channels with a
range of ±125% (+/-30 degrees servo travel), the subtrims can be set for the same neutral settings for
each model stored in the transmitter’s memory. The
sub trim functions provides precise servo arm
neutral positioning if rotating the servo arm will not
allow the desired servo arm position.
Channel to be
adjusted
Sub-Trim Value
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Travel Adjust
Exponential
Press to select
desired channel to
be adjusted (1-7).
Press the (+) or
(-) keys to
increase or
decrease the
Sub-Trim value.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default settings (0%).
Accessing Sub-Trim Adjustment Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. To access the Function mode, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SUBTRIM”
appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired
channel appears.
5. Press the (+) or (-) key to establish the desired
amount and direction of Sub-Trim.
Note: A (+) or (-) symbol appears to the left of
the sub trim value to indicate the direction of
Sub-Trim input.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Caution: Do not use excessive sub-trim
adjustments since it is possible to overrun
your servo’s maximum travel if it is off-center.
Remember that it is a trim convenience
function. It is not intended to take the place
of the proper mechanical trim adjustments
that are necessary on any R/C model. An offset
servo will also produce a differential effect.
6. To access the Exponential function, press the
Down key.
7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the Up key.
8. To exit the Sub-Trim function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
93
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 94
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.6
TRAVEL ADJUST
The purpose of travel adjust, also known as endpoint
adjustment or adjustable travel volume, is to offer
you precise servo control deflection in either
direction of servo operation. The X-378 offers travel
adjust for all seven channels. The travel adjust range
is from 0-150% (0 degrees to 60 degrees) from
neutral, or center, and it can be adjusted for each
direction individually. The factory default (data reset)
value is 100% for each direction of servo travel.
Travel direction to be
adjusted (left/Right,
Up/Down, etc)
Throttle Hold
(or CCPM Mix
if activated)
Channel to be adjusted
UP
DN
CH
Sub-Trim
CLR
Press the (+) or (-)
Press Channel to keys to increase or
select the desired decrease the SubTrim values.
channel to be
adjusted.
Press Clear to reset
to factory default
settings (100 %).
Accessing the Travel Adjust Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On
position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRAVL”
appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
appears.
5. Move the appropriate control stick (lever, switch, etc)
to the right or left of center to the direction of travel
you want to adjust. An arrow to the right of the travel
adjust value will reflect the current position to be
adjusted. Using our example above, if the aileron stick
is moved to the left, a left-facing arrow will appear to
the left of the travel adjust value on the LCD screen.
94
6. After the control stick or switch is placed in the
direction of travel to be adjusted, press the (+) or (-)
key until the proper amount of servo travel is shown
on the lower right side of the LCD. Press the (+) key
to increase the amount of servo travel. Press the (-)
key to decrease the amount of servo travel.
7. Follow the same procedure for the remaining
channels.
8. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Throttle Hold (or CCPM Mix if
activated) function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Travel Adjust function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 95
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.7
CCPM SWASHPLATE MIXING
Note: The CCPM Swashplate Mixing screen is
only displayed when Swashplate types 2Serv,
3Serv or 4Serv CCPM are selected in the
Swashplate type Selection in System Mode.
If The Swashplate Type option has not been
selected, proceed to section 6.7 Throttle Hold.
The CCPM Swashplate Mixing Function(Cyclic
Collective Pitch Mixing) of the X-378 is designed to
allow the X-378 to be used in model helicopters that
utilize 2-servo(180°), 3-servo(120°) and 3-servo(90°)
type swashplate control system.
The desired swashplate mixing type must first be
selected at the Swash Type Selection in System Mode.
CCPM Swashplate Mixing Type
Channel to be adjusted
Mix Value
Throttle Hold
Travel Adjust
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
adjust the CCPM value for each
channel, and also to activate or
inhibit the EXPO function.
Press the Clear key to reset
the CCPM values back to the
factory default positions.
Press Channel to select desired
channel and Expo settings.
Accessing the Swashplate Type
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
ON position.
2. Access the Function Mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the UP or DN key until SWASH
appears in the middle left portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
appears.
5. Press the + or - Keys to Increase or Decrease the
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
CCPM Values, or to access the EXPO function
6. Follow the same procedure for the remaining
channels.
8. To access the Travel Adjust Function, press the
Down key.
9. To access the Throttle Hold Function, press the
Up key.
10. To exit the Swashplate Type Function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
95
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 96
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
CCPM Swashplate Mixing (continued)
CCPM is a type of pitch mixing where the two or
three servos are connected directly to the swashplate
of the helicopter and physically move both together
and independently for all changes in pitch/cyclic.
Please refer to the diagram below.
CCPM Servo Variations
Ch3
Ch2
Ch6
Ch2
Ch2
2 Servo/180° CCPM
Ch3
3 Servo/90° CCPM
Note: Although the display of the X-378
indicates 4 Servo 90° CCPM, this is actually 3
Servo 90° CCPM as mentioned above. 3 Servo
90° CCPM can not be used with a 4 Servo 90°
CCPM control system.
CCPM Servo Connection/ Channel Numbers
2 servo(180°)
3 servo(120°)
3 servo(90°)
2). 2 servo(180degrees)
2 servos are used to move the swashplate, and are
spaced at 180degrees apart. This is not a very
common control system configuration.
Ch 2 Aileron
Ch 2 Elevator
Ch 6 Pitch
3). 3 servo(120degrees)
3 servos are used to move the swashplate, and are
spaced at 120degrees apart. This is the most
common form of CCPM, and is found in JR and other
brands of Helicopters.
Exponential (EXP)
The purpose of this exponential is to remove the
non- linear, or rough movement of the swashplate
due to the mechanical differential of the servo horn.
This will be a help to change circular movement of
servo horn to linear movement. The Exponential
function can be turned on and off by selecting the
EXP function with the Channel key, and then pressing
the (+) or (-) keys .
4). 3 servo(90degrees)
3 servos are used to move the swashplate, and are
spaced at 90degrees apart. This is also not a very
common control system configuration.
96
Ch6
3 Servo/120° CCPM
(JR style, most popular)
1). 1 servo (Standard Mechanical Mixing)
The most common form of Swashplate Mixing. This
type uses each of the three servo to move the
swashplate individually for pitch, Aileron, and
Elevator changes. If one servo(NORM) is selected in
the System Mode (Factory Default), the Swashplate
Type Function will not appear on the LCD screen in
this section.
Ch6
Ch 2 Aileron
Ch 3 Elevator
Ch 6 Pitch
Ch 2 Aileron
Ch 6 Pitch
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 97
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.8
THROTTLE HOLD
The Throttle Hold function is designed to hold the
throttle servo in a specific position during an
autorotation. This is very useful for practicing
autorotation landings. The throttle hold switch is
located on the top right-rear corner of the
transmitter. The throttle hold is on in the forward
switch position; in the rear position, the Throttle
Hold is off.
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to activate the
Throttle Hold
function and set the
desired value.
“ON” will flash when the
Throttle Hold function is
activated, and the switch
is in the On position.
Throttle Hold Value (+ or -)
Throttle Curve Function
Travel Adjust (or CCPM
Mix if activated)
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to activate and
adjust the Throttle
Hold value.
Press Clear to reset
to the factory default
setting (off).
Accessing the Throttle Hold Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “HOLD”
appears at the top center of the LCD.
4. The factory setting for the throttle hold is off.
Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will activate Throttle
Hold and display the current throttle hold value.
5. Using the (+) or (-) key, adjust the throttle hold value
to deliver the proper engine idle rpm for your
helicopter. The adjustable range is (-20%-+50%). Once
you establish the proper idle value for your engine, you
can use this value for throttle hold as well. To shut the
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
engine off for autorotation, a negative or zero value
should be input.
Note: When the throttle hold is activated,
and the switch is on, the ‘’ON“ indication on
the LCD flashes.
6. To access the Travel Adjust (or CCPM Mix if
activated) function, press the Down key.
7. To access the Throttle Curve function, press the
Up key.
8. To exit the Throttle Hold function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
97
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 98
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.9
THROTTLE CURVES
The X-378 offers three (3) separate throttle curves with
five adjustable points per curve. This function allows
you to customize the throttle curve and pitch curve
together to maximize engine performance at a
particular pitch setting. Once the throttle curves are
established, each can be activated in flight using the
three (3) position flight mode switch.
The flight mode switch offers three selectable ranges:
N=Normal, 1=Stunt-1, and 2=Stunt-2. The N (Normal)
position should be used as the hover throttle curve.
Positions 1 and 2 (Stunt-1 and Stunt-2) should be
used for aerobatic maneuvers and forward flight.
Note: The throttle trim and hovering throttle
levers are only operable when the flight
mode switch is in the normal position. Thus,
in the 1 or 2 positions, these two functions
have no effect. Also, adjusting the hovering
throttle lever and throttle trim has no effect
on the input values of the throttle curve.
Each of the five points of the throttle curve are
independently adjustable from 0-100%. These five
points correspond to the position of the throttle stick.
The illustration below shows the normal throttle
curve setting for the dead slow position with throttle
trim at default.
Throttle stick input position
Point to be
CH
adjusted
(L,1,2,3,H)
Flight Mode
(normal)
Point Value
Press Up to access
Throttle Curve modes
for Stunt 1 and 2.
UP
DN
CH
Throttle Hold
Press to select point position
to be adjusted (L,1,2,3,or H).
The transmitter is factory preset to the throttle
curve as indicated by the solid line in the figure at
right. Individual middle points can be increased or
decreased to suit your specific needs.
CLR
Press Clear to
reset to the
factory default
settings.
Press (+) or (-) to
activate points 1 and
3, and also to
increase or decrease
the point values.
Output Value
100%
Hovering Throttle Knob
Operating Range
50%
Throttle Trim
Operating Range
The throttle trim lever position will affect
the low-point position as shown when in
the Normal mode Throttle Curve.
0%
Point L
(INH)
(INH)
Throttle Stick
98
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 99
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
-- Lines on screen indicate
that point #1 is Inhibited
CLR
25% value indicates that point #1
is now activated
Accessing the Throttle Curve Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function Mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “THRO”
appears in the upper right portion of the LCD.
Note: The characters directly under the battery
graph at the top left of the LCD is the Flight
mode switch position curve currently being
adjusted. Use NORM for hover curves and 1
and 2 for stunt curves. We will concentrate on
the hovering curve during this example.
4. Press the Channel key to select the point of the
curve you want to change.
5. Press either the (+) or (-) key to change the value
of the current curve point. The range of each point is
0-100% in .5% intervals.
Note: In each curve, the factory setting
indicates INH for points 1 and 3. These values
are 25% and 75% respectively if no value
changes are made to any other points. If any
of the other points have been changed while
these points were inhibited, the inhibited
points will also change to plot a smooth curve.
If you want to keep this from happening, press
the Channel key until the display indicates P-1
or P-3 at the upper right portion of the LCD.
Press either the (+) or (-) key to activate the
points 1 (25%) or 3 (75%). The values for each
of these curves can then be fully adjusted by
pressing either the (+) or (-) key.
6. To set curves for flight mode switch position 1,
press the Up key once and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. To set curves for flight mode switch position 2,
press the Up key once and repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. To access the Throttle Hold function, press the
Down key until “HOLD” is displayed.
9. To exit the Throttle Curve function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
Throttle Trim Settings
The throttle trim lever is only active when the flight
mode switch is in the normal position. The throttle
trim is used to increase or decrease the engine
power when the flight mode switch is in the Normal
mode. The throttle trim lever has no effect on
positions 1, 2, or in throttle hold.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Note: Making changes to the throttle trim lever
does not change the input values for any of the
points on the throttle curve; it merely makes
adjustments to the engine idle speed position.
99
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 100
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Hovering Throttle Lever Setting
The Hovering Throttle lever increases or decreases
the engine output power for the middle three points
set for the throttle curve. As shown in the figure
below, use of the hovering throttle lever shifts the
curve upward or downward parallel with the original
curve. Therefore, operation of the hovering throttle
knob does not cause any change to the original
settings of the throttle curve.
100%
Hovering Throttle Knob
Operating Range (Parallel)
The throttle trim range will affect the throttle
curve as shown.
The adjustable range of output using the
hovering throttle lever is
approximately +/-9%.
Note: The Hovering Throttle has no effect
on flight mode switch positions 1 and 2.
50%
Throttle Trim
Operating Range
Point L
0%
Throttle Stick
Throttle Curve Exponential
With the X-378 system, individual throttle curves are
selectable to be either straight (linear) or curved
(exponential) setting.With the exponential function
on, you will notice that any sharp angles of the
throttle curve will become more “rounded” or
“smooth”, creating more equal throttle servo
movement during the entire curve range.
Accessing the Throttle Curve Exponential Function
1. From the Throttle Curve function, press the Channel
key until “EXP” appears at the center of the LCD
screen.
2. Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the Exponential
function on or off.
3. To exit the Throttle Curve function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneuosly.
100
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 101
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.10
PITCH CURVES
Adjustment of the pitch curve is very similar to the
throttle curve adjustment described in the preceding
section. A thorough understanding of the Throttle
Curve Section will make pitch curve adjustment easier
to understand. There are four independent types of
pitch curves available: Normal, Stunt-1, Stunt-2 and
Hold. Each pitch curve contains five adjustable
points: L, 1, 2, 3 and H.
Note: The pitch curve for the Throttle Hold
function can only be set if this system is
activated.
Throttle stick position
Point to be adjusted
(L,1,2,3,H)
Flight mode will flash when flight
mode switch is in the current
flight mode to be adjusted
Point value
Accessing the Pitch Curve Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “PIT” appears
in the top right portion of the LCD.
Note: The characters directly under the
battery graph at the top right portion of the
LCD is the flight mode switch position curve
currently being adjusted (Normal, 1,2 or H).
Use NORMAL for hover curves and 1 and 2
for stunt curves. We will concentrate on the
hovering curve during this example.
4. Press the Channel key to select the point of the
curve you want to change.
5. Press either the (+) or (-) key to change the value
of the current curve point. The range of each point is
0-100% in .5% intervals.
Note: In each curve, the factory setting - indicates Inhibited for points 1 and 3. These
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
values are 25% and 75% respectively, if no
value changes are made to any other points.
If any of the other points have been changed
while these points were inhibited, the
inhibited points will change to plot a smooth
curve. If you want to keep this from
happening, press the Channel key to display
the positions 1 and 3, then press the (+) or
(-) key to activate each point.
6. To set curves for Flight mode switch position 1,
press the Up key and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. To set curves for flight mode switch position 2,
press the Up key again and repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. To set the curves for the Throttle Hold mode ‘’H’’,
press the Up key once again until ‘’H’’ is displayed,
and repeat steps 4 and 5.
9. To access throttle curve switch position 2, press
the Down key four times.
10. To exit the Pitch Curve function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
101
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 102
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Hovering Pitch Lever
The Hovering Pitch lever operates in the same
manner as the Hovering Throttle knob. It is only
operable while the flight mode switch is in the ‘’N’’
(normal) position, and its function is to shift the
middle portion of the curve upward or downward.
Throttle
Example of Throttle Curve and Pitch Curve Settings
An example of throttle curve and pitch curve settings
for aerobatic specifications is shown below in the
form of graphs. Details of the curves will differ
depending on the helicopter specifications. In these
examples, the throttle open-close stroke and
autorotation pitch stroke are set 0 to 100 to ease
your understanding of other curves.
Pitch
100%
50%
100%
Normal
Hover
50%
0%
0%
Throttle
Pitch
100%
50%
100%
Stunt 1
Acrobatics
50%
0%
0%
Throttle
Pitch
100%
50%
100%
Stunt 2
3D
50%
0%
0%
Pitch
100%
Throttle
Hold
50%
0%
102
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 103
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.11
INVERTED SWITCH
The function of the Inverted Flight function
electronically reverses several control operations to
enable you to fly a helicopter much more easily.
The Inverted switch function is seldom used for 3D
flying as it was originally designed for. It is recommended that the Inverted function not be used for 3D
flying, as it is a better method to learn 3D flying
without the aid of this type of function.
When the inverted flight switch (located at the top left
front portion of the Transmitter) is pulled forward, the
Inverted Flight function is switched on. The inverted
point is the throttle position at which no collective
pitch change will take place when the Inverted Flight
function is operated. The higher the value, the further
the throttle/collective stick must be toward full throttle
position. The factory preset is 50% and is actually
somewhat less than hover throttle since the Inverted
Flight function is normally operated with the stick
toward the low-throttle position.
When the Invert Flight function is activated, collective,
rudder and elevator operations are reversed
automatically. For inverted hovering maneuvers, the
flight mode switch should be left in the N (Normal)
position. For inverted aerobatics maneuvers, it is
recommended that you set Up a pitch curve dedicated
to inverted flight. This is most often used in
conjunction with Flight mode switch position 2.
When the Inverted switch is
moved to the On position,
the word “ON” will appear
flashing on the LCD screen.
Offset Value
Revolution Mixing
Pitch Curve
Function
Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate
the Inverted function and to adjust
the offset value as needed.
Press the Clear key to reset
the Inverted function to the
factory default position (off).
Accessing the Inverted Flight Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “INVRT” is
displayed on the upper left side of the LCD.
4. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the
right portion of the display from INH to 50.0%.
Pressing either of these keys again will change the
value in the appropriate direction. When the Inverted
Flight Function is active, the word “OFFSET” will
appear below “INVRT.” If the invert switch is
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
activated, the word “ON” will flash.
5. To access the Pitch Curve function, press the Down
key.
6. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press
the Up key.
7. To exit the Inverted Flight function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
Caution: If you do not intend to use the
Inverted Flight function, leave this function’s
operation inhibited.
103
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 104
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.12
REVOLUTION MIXING (NON-HEADING LOCK GYROS ONLY)
The Revolution Mixing function mixes tail rotor with
the Throttle and Pitch Curve functions to counteract
torque from the main rotor blades. When set up
correctly, the helicopter should climb and descend
without a tendency to yaw in either direction. Because
torque reaction varies with different power settings, it
is necessary to vary the tail rotor pitch at the same
time. The X-378 offers two separate revolution mixing
programs, with independent up and down mixing for
Note: If the Throttle Stick is in the
current position being adjusted
(Example: Low stick, down (D) mix,
the letters “U” or “D” will flash)
each - one for Flight mode position N and the other
for Stunt-1 and Stunt-2 positions. The U (Up) mixing
adjusts the tail rotor compensation for the mid to
high throttle setting and the D, or down, mixing
adjusts the tail rotor compensation for the mid to low
throttle setting. Thus, if you were to move the throttle
from the low to high position, the tail rotor servo
would move from D through Hover (mid) and to the U
setting.
When a value is entered, a left or right
facing arrow will appear on the LCD
screen to indicate the mix direction
Gyro Gain Function
Inverted Function
Press Channel to access the various
up/down revolution mixing value
positions as shown to the left of the
LCD screen art above.
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to adjust the
mixing values as
needed.
Press the Clear
key to reset to the
factory default
position (0%).
Accessing the Revolution Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function Mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “RVO-U”
appears at the upper portion of the LCD.
4. Pressing the Channel key will select Up (U) or down
(D) mix and theflight mode switch position. When
the flight mode switch is in the displayed position
and the throttle stick is in the displayed position,
these two characters will flash. For example, when
the screen displays “RVO-U, NORMAL, 0%” and the
Flight mode switch is in the N position with the
throttle below half, the “U” will flash.
104
5. Press the (+) key to increase the right tail
compensation or press the (-) key to increase the left
compensation. Press the Clear key to reset to 0%.
6. This setup procedure can be used for revolution
mixing for either flight mode switch position N or 1
and 2. Switch position 1 or 2 should be used for
forward and/or inverted compensation.
7. To access the Inverted Flight function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Gyro Gain function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Revolution Mixing function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 105
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Setting Up Revolution Mixing
Set up the helicopter so that it will hover with the
tail rotor trim centered. Establish the helicopter into
a stable hover, then steadily increase the throttle to
initiate a steady climb. The body of the helicopter
will move in the opposite direction to the main rotor
rotation. Increase the U, or Up, setting until the
helicopter climbs with no tendency to turn. At a safe
altitude, close the throttle; the helicopter will
descend and the body will turn in the same direction
as the main rotor rotation. Increase the D, or down,
mix until the helicopter descends with no tendency
to turn. Throttle stick movements should be slow,
and the initial acceleration and deceleration swings
should be ignored.
When throttle is in the hold position (autorotation),
revolution and acceleration mixings are off. The
Acceleration Mixing function is provided to
compensate for the main rotor acceleration (and
deceleration) torque. The magnitude and duration of
the signal to the tail rotor depends Upon the rate of
the throttle changes. Thus, quick, jerky throttle
inputs will yield more noticeable tail compensation.
Note: The Revolution Mix function must be
established before an accurate acceleration
mix can be achieved, and the gyro should be
switched off.
Accessing the Acceleration Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function Mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “RVO-U”
appears at the center of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until “ACC.” appears at the
center of the LCD.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
5. Using the (+) or (-) key, increase or decrease the
acceleration mix until no tail swing is noticed when
the throttle is increased or decreased abruptly.
6. To access the Inverted function, press the Down key.
7. To access the Gyro Gain function, press the Up key.
8. To exit the Revolution Mixing function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
105
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 106
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.13
GYRO GAIN FUNCTION
The X-378 offers two different types of Gyro Sensitivity
Adjustments: manual or automatic. This feature gives
the user the choice of selecting gyro sensitivity
through the rudder dual rate switch(AUX-2) or
automatically through the flight mode switch. If you
do not intend to use this function, leave this
operation at the factory default position (off).
Gyro Gain
position 0
Position to be adjusted
Gyro gain value
Programmable Mixing
Revolution
Mixing
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to activate and
adjust the settings of
the Gyro Gain function.
Press the Clear key to
inhibit the gyro gain
function or to reset the
values to the factory
default settings.
Press Channel to select function to be
changed/adjusted (Switch position,
Function, Gain Value).
Accessing the Gyro Gain Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “GYRO”
appears at the center of the LCD.
4. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the Gyro Gain
function. The name on the display will change from
GYRO to a flashing “GYR-0.”
5. Press the Channel key to select the function to be
adjusted
106
6. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate and adjust the
settings of the Gyro Gain function.
7. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Programmable Mixing function,
press the Up key.
7. To exit the Gyro Gain function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 107
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Manual Gyro Sensitivity Adjustment
Manual gyro sensitivity adjustment allows the pilot
to select from two different gyro sensitivities during
all flight conditions. This function is activated in
conjunction with the rudder dual rate(AUX-2) switch.
1 Select the position for gyro sensitivity by pressing
Channel key. “GYR-0” will be flashing. Select the Gyro
Gain position 0 or 1 by pressing (+) or (-) key.
2. Select the type of sensitivity adjustments by
pressing the Channel key once. The letter “N” or “A”
will now also be flashing at the upper right portion of
the LCD. “N” is for manual (AUX 2 switch) and “A” for
Automatic (Flight mode switch).
3 For manual operation, select the N by pressing (+)
or (-) key.
4 Press the Channel key once again and you will see
a right arrow flashing at the lower left portion of the
LCD. This indicates that you can now adjust the gain
value for the 0 AUX 2 switch position by using the (+)
or (-)keys.
Manual Gyro Gain (Aux 2 Switch Activation) Positions
Switch Position for Gyro Sensitivity
0 and 1
Type of Sensitivity Adjustment
N for manual
A for Automatic
Gyro Sensitivity Range 0 to 100%
1. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press
the Down key.
2. To access the Programmable Mixing function,
press the Up key.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
3. To exit the Gyro Gain function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
107
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 108
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Automatic Gyro Sensitivity Adjustment
Automatic gyro sensitivity adjustment feature allows
the pilot to automatically alter the sensitivity of the
gyro from either of two pre-determined settings
through the use of the flight mode switch. As different
flight modes are selected, the gyro’s sensitivity rate
will switch to the predetermined compensation rate
for each particular flight mode in use.
Automatic (A) or
Manual (N)
function selected
Flight mode position to
be adjusted
Gain position
(0 or 1)
Programmable Mixing
Revolution Mixing
Press the (+) or (-)
Press the Clear key to
keys to select the
reset to the factory
Flight mode position, default positions.
and to adjust the gain
position and values.
Press Channel to select position to be
adjusted ( Flight Mode, Function, Values).
Activating the Automatic Gyro Gain Function
1 To activate the Automatic Gyro Gain function, press
the Channel key once. The letter “N” or “A” will now also
be flashing at the upper right portion of the LCD. “N”
is for manual (Aux 2 switch) and “A” for Automatic
(Flight mode switch).
2 For Automatic operation, select the “A” by pressing
(+) or (-) key.
3 Press the Channel key once again and you will see a
right arrow flashing at the lower left portion of the
LCD. This indicates that you can now adjust the gain
value for the 0 gain position by using the (+) or (-)
keys.
4 To adjust the gain position 1, press the Channel key
until the word “GYR-0” is flashing on the screen.
Next, press the (+) or (-) keys and the screen will
change to read “GYR-1.” Press the Channel key twice
108
until there is a flashing right arrow at the bottom left
of the screen. This indicates that you can now adjust
the gain value for the 1 gain position by using the (+)
or (-) keys.
5 To adjust the gain positions (0 or 1) for each flight
mode, press the Channel key until “GYR-0” or “GYR-1”
is flashing on the LCD. Next, press the (=) or (-) keys
until the word “G.NOR” (normal mode) is displayed.
6 Next, press the Channel key twice until the flashing
right arrow at the bottom left of the LCD is present.
7 Press the (+) or (-) keys to change the Gain
position from the 0 to 1 position as needed.
Repeat Steps 5 through 7 above to select the gain
positions (0 or 1) for each of the remaining flight
modes.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 109
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
To Access the Automatic Gyro Gain Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function Mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “GYRO”
appears at the center of the LCD.
4. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the Gyro Gain
function. The name on the display will change from
“GYRO” to a flashing “GYR-0.”
5. Press the Channel key so that the 0 and N letters
are flashing on the LCD screen.
6. Press the (+) or (-) keys. The “N” on the screen will
change to “A,” indicating that the Automatic Gyro
Gain function has been selected.
7. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Programmable Mixing function,
press the Up key.
9. To exit the Gyro Gain function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
Flight Modes
Recommended Gyro Gain positions
Normal (G.NOR)
Stunt (G.STN)
Hold (G.HLD)
Inverted(G.INV)
Gyro Remote Gain Connections: JR G460T and Other
Remote Gain Gyros
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Connect the white connector to from the G460T to
the AUX2 channel of the receiver.
109
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 110
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.14
PROGRAMMABLE MIXING 1-3
The X-378 offers three programmable mixes to be
used for any number of different purposes. This
function allows mixing any one channel to any other
channel to make the aircraft easier to fly. This mix can
be set in the computer and remain on at all times or
switched on and off in flight using a number of
different switches. Each channel of this radio is
identified by a number. The chart below indicates the
channel and its corresponding number. These
numbers are used to establish the mixes. The number
appearing first is known as the “master channel” or
the channel to which you want to mix. The second
number is known as the “slave channel” or the
channel that is being mixed into the master. For
example, 2-1 would indicate aileron-to-throttle
mixing. Thus, each time the aileron stick is moved,
UP
Press to select
Programmable
Mix #2 and #3.
DN
Gyro Gain
function
the throttle will increase or decrease based on the
value of the input. Mixing is proportional, so small
inputs of the master channel will produce small
outputs of the slave channel.
Note that when using any programmable mix
coupled to the throttle channel of the X-378,
it will be necessary to increase the high
throttle travel position of the channel to the
maximum 150% to prevent over-traveling of
the throttle by the addition of the
programmable mix.
Each programmable mix has a mixing “offset.” The
purpose of the mixing offset is to redefine the neutral
position of the slave channel.
CH
CLR
Press to activate and select master
mixing channel assignment.
Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “MIX” and
the number “1” appears at the upper right portion of
the LCD.
4. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the mix.
5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the master
channel.
110
6. Press the Channel key and then the (+) or (-) keys
to select the slave channel.
7. Press the Channel key until a flashing arrow
appears at the bottom right portion of the LCD. This
left/right or up/down arrow indicates the current stick
position of the master channel.
8. Move the master stick to the left/right or up/down
position to be adjusted, and then use the (+) or (-)
keys to assign the desired mixing values.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 111
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Slave channel
selected
Master channel
selected
Mix Value
Master stick
position to be
adjusted
On or Off
Programmable
Mixes 2 and 3
Gyro Gain
Function
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to adjust channel
selection, mixing
values, and activation
switch positions.
Press Clear to
reset to factory
default settings.
Press Channel to select function
to be adjusted (Master/Slave/Mix
Value/Switch Selection).
Assigning the Mix Activation
The programmable mixes can be turned on and off in
flight using a variety of different switches. The chart
below lists the indication seen on the LCD display
and its definition. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will
change the mixing On/Off switches.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Note: When the particular switch selected is in
the Off position, the mixing value will indicate
“Off.“
111
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 112
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Selecting the Mix Activation Switch
1. Press the Channel key once. The letters “ON,” as
well as a smaller “SW” will appear at the center of
the LCD.
2. Press the (+) or (-) keys to assign the mix
activation to the options shown at right:
Program Mix #1
ON: Always on
F-NR: Flight mode normal only
(Activated by the flight mode switch)
F-S12: Flight Modes 1 and 2 only
(Activated by the flight mode switch)
F-S2: Flight Mode 2 only
(Activated by the flight mode switch)
Program Mix #2
ON: Always on
Hold: Throttle Hold only
(Activated by the Throttle Hold switch)
F-S12: Flight Modes 1 and 2 only (Activated by the
flight mode switch)
GEAR: Activated by the Gear switch
Program Mix #3
ON: Always on
Hold: Throttle Hold only
(Activated by the Throttle Hold switch)
F-S12: Flight Modes 1 and 2 only (Activated by the
flight mode switch)
GEAR: Activated by the Gear switch
Press the Clear key to reset to 0. Note: The master
channel trim must be centered for this to reset to
0 using the Clear key.
10. Press the Down key to access the Gyro Gain
function.
11. Press the Up key to access the Programmable Mix
#2 and #3.
12. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
exit the Programmable Mixing function.
112
Note: With a little practice, programmable
mixing will be very easy compared to the
first time you try it. Remember, the beauty
of a computer radio is, if you don’t like
something, you can change it. Mixing is
only limited by your imagination.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 113
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Programmable Mixing Offsets
Any stick position of the master channel can be
determined as the basic center point of mixing. The
basic point is the position of the master channel
stick, control switch, or knob where you set the mix
value and the direction of mixing.
To set the basic point of mixing, hold the master
channel in the desired position and press the Clear
key. The display will indicate offset value from
neutral; however, mixing value at the determined
position would indicate zero.
When properly adjusted, your heli should track
across the sky at full speed with no correction
needed. The X-378 has three programmable mixes
that can free mix any two channels. Following are
some examples of where this free mixing is used.
Pitch-to-Elevator Mixing
At full throttle, fast forward flight, most helicopters
pitch either up or down. The X-378 has active digital
trims in each flight mode to correct this. However, at
intermediate speeds (e.g., 5/8 throttle) this pitching
tendency is reduced.
Many top pilots use a combination of elevator stunt
trim and Pitch-to-Elevator Mixing. Mix pitch (channel
6) to Elevator (channel 3) and select switch position 1,
2 so that the mixing is turned on in Flight mode 1 and 2.
Then, hover your helicopter. Using forward cyclic
only, push your heli into forward flight, but don’t
change the pitch or throttle settings. After
transitioning into forward flight, notice the direction
the nose pitches. Correct this with stunt trim elevator
until no pitching occurs at this throttle pitch setting.
Finally, fly your helicopter at full throttle/pitch in fast
forward flight. If the nose pitches up, feed in down
pitch to elevator mixing until straight flight is
achieved. When properly adjusted, the heli will fly
straight and level, hands off, at all throttle pitch
settings.
Rudder-to-Throttle Mixing
During 540 stall turns and fast pirouettes, the tail
rotor absorbs power and the main rotor rpm decays.
This can be compensated for by mixing rudder-tothrottle so that when rudder is applied, the throttle
is advanced. It usually takes about 15% right mixing
and 10% left mixing.
Please note that when using any programmable mix
coupled to the throttle channel of the X-378, it will
be necessary to increase the high throttle travel
position of the channel to the maximum 150% to
prevent over-traveling of the throttle by the addition
of the programmable mix.
Aileron-to-Throttle Mixing
When doing a roll or at anytime hard-over cyclic is
used, the main rotor’s rpm can decay due to
increased loads. A way around this is to mix aileron
to throttle so that when the aileron is displaced,
throttle is added. Use about 10-30 % in both
directions.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
Please note that when using any programmable mix
coupled to the throttle channel of the X-378, it will
be necessary to increase the high throttle travel
position of the channel to the maximum 150% to
prevent over-traveling of the throttle by the addition
of the programmable mix.
113
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 114
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.15
PCM FAIL-SAFE/HOLD FUNCTION
The Fail-Safe/Hold function is available only when
you use the XP-783 transmitter in either of the PCM
modulations: S-PCM or Z-PCM. This function is
designed to help minimize damage to your aircraft
during a loss of signal to the receiver. The servos
either assume the fail-safe presets or hold their last
good signal position.
the PPM modulation, the Fail-Safe/Hold
function is not applicable. Therefore, the FailSafe/Hold function will not appear on your
LCD in the PPM mode. Refer to the
Modulation Selection section for more
information pertaining to the broadcast signal
of your XP-783 helicopter transmitter.
Note: In the PCM modulations, the FailSafe/Hold function cannot be totally disabled
so that the servos will react to interference in
the same way as they do in a PPM system. This
is only possible with the use of a PPM receiver
and the transmitter in the PPM modulation.
Since the actual screen appearance varies
depending on the modulation of your radio,
refer to the appropriate modulation section
which follows. As noted earlier, if you are in
Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in Z-PCM
Modulation Hold (Z-PCM) The Hold function is
automatically activated when the radio is turned on
and is in the Z-PCM modulation. This function stops
(or holds) the servos in the positions they were in just
prior to the interference. Therefore, your aircraft
maintains the position held immediately before the
interference was experienced. When a clear signal is
restored, the Hold function releases and control of
the airplane returns to you.
Trainer Function
Programmable Mix 3
Move the control sticks to
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
the desired HOLD position,
select the desired hold delay time. then press Clear to store
these positions.
Accessing the PCM Hold Function (Z-PCM)
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On
(upper) position.
2. While the power switch is in the On position, press
the Up and Down keys simultaneously to access the
Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FAL.S” (FailSafe) appears in the left portion of your LCD.
Note: If “FAL.S” does not appear on your
LCD, it is because you are transmitting in
PPM. Fail-Safe is not applicable in the PPM
mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode
Selection section for more information.
You should never attempt to adjust the FailSafe function when the aircraft is running.
114
When the Fail-Safe function is activated (i.e., when the
signal is interrupted), the transmitter automatically
moves each servo to a preset position. The position
that each servo assumes is determined by you, as is
the time length of interference that must occur before
servo movement.
After the interference has ceased, control of the aircraft
returns immediately to you. There are three time delays
to choose from: 1/3 second, 1/2 second and 1.0 second.
These time delays are the amount of time it takes,
starting the moment the interference occurs, until the
servos assume their preset positions.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 115
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Setting the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in Z-PCM Modulation
1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, adjust the
Fail-Safe presets.
2. Select among the three time delays (.25, .50 or 1.0
second), by pressing (+) or (-) key until the
appropriate delay appears on the screen.
3. Hold the transmitter sticks in the positions that
you want the servos to assume during signal loss
conditions. You can determine fail-safe preset
positions for the other channels by placing the
potentiometers and switches in the positions that
you want them to assume during interference.
5. With the sticks, switches and potentiometers in
the Fail-Safe positions, touch the Clear key. This will
enter these locations as the fail-safe memory settings.
6. To confirm that the input of data was successful,
switch the transmitter off. The controls will move to
the input locations. If not, repeat Step 5 again.
7. To access the Programmable Mix 3 function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Fail-Safe function, press the Up and
Down keys simultaneously.
Note: These preset positions remain stored
in the transmitter’s memory until both the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium back
up battery have been removed (or until data
reset has been performed). Therefore, you do
not have to reset the Fail-Safe each time you
fly. Should you want to re-adjust the Fail-Safe
presets, access the Fail-Safe function and
adjust the presets as you have just done. The
transmitter automatically recalls the settings
for the last Fail-Safe adjustment.
Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in S-PCM Modulation
The Hold function is automatically activated when the
radio is turned on and is in the S-PCM modulation.
This function stops (or holds) the servos in the
positions they were in just prior to the interference.
Therefore, your aircraft maintains the position held
immediately before the interference was experienced.
When a clear signal is restored, the Hold function
releases, and control of the aircraft returns to you.
Fail-Safe channel to
be programmed
Trainer Function
Programmable Mix 3
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to select the Hold (HO)
or Fail-Safe (F.S.) modes
for each channel.
Press the Clear key to store
the Fail-Safe servo positions
for all channels set to F.S.
Press Channel to select
the desired channel to
be programmed.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
115
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 116
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in S-PCM Modulation
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On
(upper) position.
2. While the power switch is in the On position, press
the Up and Down keys simultaneously to access the
Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FAL.S”
appears in the left portion of your LCD.
Note: If “FAL.S” does not appear on your LCD, it
is because you are transmitting in PPM. FailSafe is not applicable in the PPM mode. Refer
to the Modulation Mode Selection section for
more information.
Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modulation
The XP-783 allows you to combine the Hold and FailSafe presets for all seven channels on the receiver;
you can select Fail-Safe or Hold independently for all
channels on your aircraft. Some channels will hold
their last clear signal position, while others assume
the preset position. Once the Fail-Safe has been
activated by signal interruption (interference), the
transmitter automatically moves the servos to a
preset position.
The predetermined servo positions are set by you. In
the S-PCM Fail-Safe, the time delay (the amount of
time it takes, starting the moment the interference
occurs, until the servos assume the preset positions)
is fixed at .25 seconds. After the interference has
ceased, normal operation of the aircraft returns to
you immediately.
Setting Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modulation
1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, it is time to
adjust the fail-safe presets.
2. Select all of the channels for which you want to
enter a fail-safe preset. To do so, use the Channel key
until the appropriate channel number appears on the
LCD. We will use only channel 2 (aileron) for our
example. The display will appear as follows:
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key. This will change the
display from hold to the Fail-Safe preset display.
Note: Your LCD may display a number on
the right side. This number is the previous
fail-safe preset of the stick, switch, and
potentiometer position of your transmitter at
last fail-safe memorization. The display will
appear as follows:
4. Next, press the Up key one time. Once again your
display will change. It will appear as:
5. Hold the appropriate transmitter control stick
(potentiometer or switch) in the desired location and
press the Clear key. This will enter the location as the
fail-safe memory setting for the relative channel.
Continuing our example, hold the aileron stick to the
right and press the Clear key.
6. Press the Down key. Your Fail-Safe preset value will
be displayed on the LCD.
Note: Values will change between
transmitters. In our example, the screen
would appear as follows:
7. To confirm that the input of data was successful to
the applicable channels, switch the transmitter off.
The respective channels will move to the input
locations.
8. To access the Mixing B function, press the
Down key.
9. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Fail-Safe/Hold function, press the
Up and Down keys simultaneously.
Note: These preset positions remain stored
in the transmitter’s memory until both the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium
backup battery have been removed (or until
the Data Reset function has been utilized).
Therefore, you do not have to reset the FailSafe each time you fly. Should you want to
re-adjust the Fail-Safe preset position,
access the Fail-Safe function once again and
adjust the presets as you have just done. The
transmitter automatically recalls the settings
for the latest Fail-Safe adjustment.
116
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 117
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.16
TRAINER SYSTEM
The X-378 transmitter employs two separate types of
trainer systems:
1. Normal Trainer System - All functions are
controlled by either the master transmitter or the
slave transmitter
2. Programmable Function Trainer Stick functions may
be assigned to the slave one at a time. Since the control
functions can be transferred one at a time, students can
concentrate on only one function at a time until they
are competent to fly solo.
Trainer function
type selected
Current trainer mode
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Timer Function
Press the + or - keys to
change the settings of
each channel.
Fail Safe
Function
Press Clear to reset
the factory default
settings.
Press Channel to select the desired
channel to be programmed.
Accessing the Programmable Trainer Function
1. Move the transmitter switch to the On
(Upper) position.
2. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press the Up or Down key until “TRN.” appears on
the left portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key to select the channel
indicated just to the right of the TRN.
5. Once the channel appears that you want to make a
slave, press the (+) or (-) key. This will change the
display from “NORM” to “SLAV.” If you want to make
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
more slave channels, press the Channel key until the
next desired channel is shown and press the (+) or
(-) key.
6. To change the Programmable Trainer function back
to normal system, press the Clear key.
7. To access the Fail-Safe function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Timer function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Trainer function, press the Up and Down
keys simultaneously.
117
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 118
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Basic Connections and Conditions for Training
1. The slave transmitter must be PPM (Pulse Position
Modulation) with a DSC (Direct Servo Control) jack.
If the slave transmitter is PPM/PCM selectable, select
PPM. The master transmitter can be PCM or PPM.
2. Plug the trainer cord (optional part #JRPA130) into
each transmitter’s DSC jack.
Note: Each transmitter will appear to be on,
but neither is actually transmitting at this time.
3. Switch the master transmitter on. Do not switch
on the slave transmitter; it is only necessary to have
the master transmitter on.
Note: If the master transmitter is the XP-783,
its LCD will indicate “TRN.M” (Trainer Master)
when the power switch is on.
4. Pull the trainer switch toward you to transfer
control to the slave. Releasing the switch
automatically reverts to the master transmitter.
5. Be sure the slave transmitter’s servo reversing,
dual rates, end-point adjustment and trims are
identical to the master transmitter. This can be
checked by pulling the trainer switch toward you. If
the control surfaces move, adjust the slave
transmitter until the trainer switch can be activated
without a change of the control surface position.
Use of the Normal Trainer System
In this mode, all functions are switched from the
master to the slave using the trainer switch. This is
the Normal mode; no function setup is necessary to
activate this system.
Use of the Programmable Trainer Function (PTF)
In this mode, the master may assign functions to the
student one at a time to make learning to fly easier.
118
The master may assign the slave rudder
and elevator. Then, when the trainer switch is
activated (pulled forward), the slave has control of
rudder and elevator only while the master retains
control of throttle and aileron.
Note: When all channels are set to master,
the Trainer System becomes Normal.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 119
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
6.17
TIMER FUNCTION
The X-378 offers two separate types of Timer
functions: Countdown and Stopwatch. The
Countdown Timer time is input in 10 second intervals
up to 35 minutes. The timer can be set for each
individual model and retained in memory.
In order for the Timer function to be activated, it must
be in the Normal display. From the Normal display,
pressing the Channel key will change the left side of
the LCD from the model name to the Timer function.
The timer is now started and stopped by pressing
either the (+) or (-) key. It can also be started and
stopped using the snap roll/trainer switch at the leftrear portion of the transmitter. When the X-378 is
being used as the master transmitter in the Training
function the trainer switch will not operate the timer
start/stop function.
Note: In the Countdown mode, the
transmitter will beep three times: 30 seconds,
two times at 20 seconds, and beep one time
every second from :10 to 0. At zero there will
be a continuous tone for 1 second and then
the timer will begin counting up with a (+)
indication to the left of the time value. When
used as the stop-watch, the timer will count
up to 44 minutes 59 seconds, at which time it
will reset to zero and continue to count.
Timer Option Selected
Timer Value Set
Servo Reversing
Press the (+) or = keys to
increase or decrease the
time value.
Trainer Function
Press Clear to reset the down
timer value to the factory
default position (10:00).
Press Channel to select timer options
(Off, Down-Timer, Stop Watch).
Accessing the Timer Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously to
enter the Function Mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TIMR” is
displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
4. The “STP.W” in the right portion of the display
indicates the timer is in the Stopwatch (count-up)
mode.
5. Pressing the (+) key will change the display to :10
each time the (+) is pressed, and the value will
increase in 10 second intervals Up to 35:00 minutes.
This is the Countdown Timer value. Pressing the
Clear key will reset the Countdown Timer to the
Stopwatch mode.
6. To access the Trainer function, press the Down key.
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
7. To access the Integral Timer function, press the Up key.
8. To exit the Timer function, press the Up and Down
keys simultaneously.
Note: The Countdown Timer and Stopwatch can
not operate simultaneously; If the Countdown
Timer is set, the stopwatch is inhibited; if the
Countdown Timer is inhibited, the stopwatch is
defaulted to.The function of the Integral Timer
is to keep track of the accumulated time in use.
The Integral Timer counts up to 100 hours in
one-minute increments. It is best to reset this
timer each time the transmitter is recharged.
The timer will then indicate the time of use on
that particular charge.
119
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 120
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter
Accessing the Integral Timer Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “INT.T” is
displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
4. The accumulated time of use will be displayed in
the right portion of the LCD. To reset, press the Clear
key. Note that the colon (:) flashes at a frequency of
once per second.
5. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.
6. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Up key.
7. To exit the Integral Timer unction, press the Up
and Down keys simultaneously.
120
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 121
CHAPTER 7: DATA SHEET • Helicopter
X-378 MANUAL Helicopter
121
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 122
SECTION IV • CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane
1.1
CONTROL IDENTIFICATION AND LOCATION
Sailplane Version Transmitter
Flap Mixing
Switch
Crow Switch
Flapperon/
Flap Trim
Lever
Flap (Aileron)
Trim Lever
Timer/Trainer
Button
Elevator DR
Switch
On/Off
Switch
Rudder DR
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
Digital Spoiler
Trim Lever
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Spoiler/Rudder
Stick
Neck Strap Eyelett
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Increase/Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
Clear Key
Channel Key
1.2
Aileron D/R
Switch
LCD Display
RECEIVER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT/THROTTLE ALT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
Spoiler Channel
Left Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
Gear Channel (right aileron channel—AILE 2)
Auxiliary 1 Channel (left flap channel for dual flaps)
Auxiliary 2 Channel (right flap channel for dual flaps)
Throttle ALT
This function makes the throttle stick trim active only
when the throttle stick is at less than half throttle,
122
which allows for fine adjustment of the spoilers with
the throttle stick in the lower position.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 123
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane
Helicopter Version Transmitter–Airplane Mode
Flap Mix Switch
AUX 2
Lever
Gear Switch
Flap Lever Snap
Roll/Timer
Trainer/Button
Aileron
D/R Switch
Rudder DR
Switch
Elevator DR
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
On/Off
Switch
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Digital Throttle
Trim Lever
Rudder/Throttle
Control Stick
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Increase/
Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll
Buttons
Clear Key
Channel Key
LCD Display
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
5.
6.
7.
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
Gear Channel
Auxiliary 1 Channel (Flap)
Auxiliary 2 Channel (Spoiler)
Helicopter Version Transmitter–Heli Mode
Flight Mode
Switch
Hover Pitch
Lever
Hover Throttle
Lever
Gear Switch
Timer/Trainer
Button
Elevator DR
Switch
Throttle Kill
Button
Rudder DR
Switch
Digital Elevator
Trim Lever
On/Off
Switch
Aileron/Elevator
Control Stick
Digital Throttle
Trim Lever
Throttle/Rudder
Stick
Neck Strap Eyelett
Digital Aileron
Trim Lever
Digital Rudder
Trim Lever
Increase/Decrease
Programming Buttons
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
Clear Key
Channel Key
LCD Display
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Throttle Channel
Aileron Channel
Elevator Channel
Rudder Channel
5.
6.
7.
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
Gear Channel
Auxiliary 1 Channel (Pitch)
Auxiliary 2 Channel
(Gyro Sensitivity)
123
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 124
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane
1.3
TRANSMITTER REAR
TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL
CHARGING JACK FOR
NI-CD BATTERY ONLY
(8N-550)
DSC/ TRAINER JACK
Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice
The Federal Communications Commission (FFC) requires that
changes in transmitter frequency must be performed only by an
authorized service technician (Horizon Service Center). Any
transmitter frequency change made by non-certified technician
may result in a violation of the FCC rules.
SPOILERS TENSION SCREW
ELEVATOR TENSION SCREW
RUDDER TENSION SCREW
AILERON TENSION SCREW
124
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 125
CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane
1.4
CONTROL STICK LENGTH ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the stick length, use the 2mm Allen wrench
(supplied with your X-378 transmitter) to unlock the
set screw.
(JRPA047) that is approximately one inch longer than
the standard stick. This stick, crafted from bar stock
aluminum, is available at your local JR dealer.
SET SCREW
Note: Turn the wrench counterclockwise to
loosen the screw. Then, turn the stick clockwise
to shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen.
LOOSEN
After the control stick length has been adjusted to
suit your flying style, tighten the 2mm set screw. If
you desire longer sticks, JR offers a thicker stick
1.5
CONTROL STICK TENSION ADJUSTMENT
Remove the Ni-Cd battery and six transmitter back
screws as shown on previous page). Pull the
transmitter crystal and then remove the transmitter
back, being careful not to cause damage to any of the
components.
1.6
TIGHTEN
Adjust each screw for desired tension
(counterclockwise to loosen stick feel, clockwise to
tighten stick feel). When adjusting the throttle ratchet
tension, make sure that the adjusting screw does not
touch the PC board after adjustment is complete.
DIRECT SERVO CONTROL (DSC)
For proper DSC hook-up and operation:
1. Leave the transmitter power switch in the Off
position. The transmitter will not transmit any radio
frequency (RF) in this position.
2. Plug the DSC cord (supplied) into the DSC port in
the rear of the transmitter.
3. The encoder section of the transmitter will now be
operational, and the LCD display will be lit.
4. Plug the other end of the DSC cord into the
receiver charge receptacle. Turn the switch harness
to the On position. When you install the charging
jack, be sure to hook the charging jack receptacle
securely into the switch harness charge cord.
Why you should use the DSC function:
1. The DSC enables you to check the control surfaces
of your aircraft without drawing the fully operational
200mAh from your transmitter battery pack. Instead,
you will only draw 70mAh when using the DSC
function.
2. The DSC function allows you to make final
adjustments to your airplane without transmitting
any radio signals. Therefore, if another pilot is flying
on your frequency, you can still adjust your aircraft
and not interfere with the other pilot’s aircraft.
Note: Under no circumstances should you
attempt to fly your aircraft with the DSC cord
plugged in! This function is for benchchecking your airplane only.
A—Charge Cord/DSC Receptacle
B—Switch Harness Lead
C—Charger/DCS Cord
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
125
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 126
CHAPTER 1: CONNECTIONS • Sailplane
1.7
NECK STRAP ATTACHMENT
An eyelet is provided on the face of the X-378
transmitter that allows you to connect a Neck Strap
(JRPA023). This hook has been positioned so that
your transmitter has the best possible balance when
you use the neck strap.
1.8
BASE LOADED ANTENNA
An optional Base-Loaded Antenna is available for
use with the X-378 transmitter. It is considerably
shorter than the standard antenna. However, the
base loaded antenna cannot be collapsed for storage
inside the transmitter. You must also use an adaptor
1.9
(JRPA156) to attach the antenna to your
X-378. The Base Loaded Antenna (JRPA155) is made
of a flexible coil and is covered with a soft plastic
material. Your range will not be affected when using
the base loaded antenna.
FREQUENCY NOTES/AIRCRAFT ONLY FREQUENCIES
The X-378 transmitter employs a plug-in crystal for
transmitter that is glued in place at the time of
shipment. Per FCC regulation, the transmitter crystal
should only be changed by a certified technician.
Changing of the transmitter crystal by a non
authorized technician could result in a violation
of FCC rules.
The X-378 can transmit in either Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM) or Pulse Position Modulation
(PPM, commonly referred to as FM).
Be certain to observe the following guidelines:
1. Do not operate your transmitter when another
transmitter is using the same frequency, regardless
of whether the second transmitter is PCM, PPM (FM)
or AM. You can never operate two transmitters on
the same frequency simultaneously without causing
interference to both receivers and crashing both
aircraft.
126
Note: Double-check to ensure that the neck
strap is securely fastened to the transmitter.
2. For operation of your X-378 with additional
receivers, you should refer to the receiver
compatibility chart. The chart is located in the
Modulation Selection Section of this manual.
Aircraft-Only Frequencies
JR RF modules and receivers are available in 72MHz
frequencies in the United States for use with model
aircraft. Employing 72MHz frequencies does not
require a special operator’s license from the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC).
* A chart for all available frequencies is located
on page 185 of this manual.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 127
CHAPTER 2: CONNECTIONS • Sailplane
2.1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
It is extremely important that your radio system be
correctly installed in your model. Here are a few
suggestions on the installation of your JR equipment:
The brass bushings are pushed from the bottom up
in the rubber grommets. When the servo screw is
tightened securely, it provides the proper security as
well as the proper vibration isolation for your servo.
3. The servos must be able to move freely over their
entire range of travel. Make sure that the control
linkages do not bind or impede the movement of any
of the servos.
4. Mount all switches away from the engine exhaust
and away from any high vibration areas. Make sure
the switch operates freely and is able to operate over
its full travel.
5. Mount the receiver antenna firmly to the airplane
to ensure that it will not become entangled in the
propeller or control surfaces.
1. Wrap the receiver in protective foam rubber that
is no less than 3/8 inch thick. Secure the foam to the
receiver with #64 rubber bands. This protects the
receiver in the event of a crash or a very hard
landing.
2. The servos should be mounted using rubber
grommets and brass bushings to isolate them from
vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws;
this will negate the vibration absorption effect of the
rubber grommets. The diagram
on the right will assist you in
properly mounting
your servo.
2.2
CONNECTIONS
®
4N600
RECEIVER BATTERY 4N-600
4.8V 600mAh
JAPAN REMOTE CONTROL CO., LTD.
DELUXE SWITCH HARNESS
(JRPA0001)
ON
OFF
BATTERY
CHARGE CORD OR
D.S.C. RECEPTACLE
(JRPS024)
AUXILIARY 2
AUXILIARY 1
B AT T
CHARGE CORD OR D.S.C.
D.S.C.-(JRPA132)
CHARGER-(JRPC221)
7 CH 72MHz FM SLIMLINE
RECEIVER
ABC&W INTERFERENCE
PROTECTION SYSTEM
AUX1
GEAR
RUDD
GEAR
RUDDER
ELEV
AILE
ELEVATOR
THRO
AILERON
R700 RECEIVER
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
THROTTLE/SPOILER
127
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 128
CHAPTER 3: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
KEY INPUT AND DISPLAY
The Function Selection keys are used to move up and
down through the functions.The Channel key is used
to advance the channel or function selected. The
Increase and Decrease keys are used to make changes in
the selected functions.
Increase
Up
Function Selection Keys
Decrease
Down
(Press both keys at the same
time to enter or exit the
function mode.)
Clear/Store
Channel
Hereafter, explanation of all functions in this manual
will use the following designations to indicate
pressing individual keys:
UP
DN
CH
CLR
CHAPTER 4: ALARM AND ERROR DISPLAY • Sailplane
4.1
BATTERY ALARM AND DISPLAY
When the transmitter voltage drops below 9.0-volts
DC, the display flashes “BATT” and an alarm sounds
4.2
BACK-UP ERROR DISPLAY
All preprogrammed data is protected by a five-year
lithium battery that guards against main transmitter
battery failure. Should the lithium battery fail, the
display will indicate ERR1 regardless of the position
of the On/Off switch. If this occurs, it will be
necessary to replace the battery and reprogram all
data. All transmitter programs will return to the
factory default settings, and the data you have input
will be lost. When it becomes necessary to replace
the lithium back-up battery, contact JR Horizon
Service Center. Due to the possibility of extensive
128
seven times. If you are flying when this occurs, land
immediately.
damage caused by improper removal or replacement,
only JR Horizon Service Center is authorized to make
this change.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 129
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.1
NORMAL DISPLAY
When the power switch is in the On position, the
display will read as follows:
Modulation type
Model Type
Model Number
Battery/Voltage Indicators
Throttle Trim
Elevator Trim
Model Name
Rudder Trim
Aileron Trim
To enter the System mode, press simultaneously then
turn on the power switch. To enter the Function model,
turn on the power switch, then press simultaneously.
UP
DN
CH
In the Timer mode, press the
Channel key to Start/Stop the timer.
5.2
CLR
Press the Clear key to reset
the timer.
DIRECT ACCESS DIGITAL TRIMS
The X-378 is equipped with a Direct Access Digital
Trim Value function. When at the normal display, if a
digital trim lever is moved, the screen will
automatically change to show the current trim value
for the channel being adjusted. When the trim is
returned to center, the screen will change back to the
normal display screen after a few seconds.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Displays the current trim value for the
channel being adjusted
129
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 130
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.3
SYSTEM MODE
To enter the System mode, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously, then turn the power
switch to the on position. The display will show the
last active program. Pressing either the Up or Down
key then scrolls through the functions one by one,
according to the System Mode flowchart shown at
the right. Once the appropriate function is displayed,
changes can be made by pressing the (+) or (-) keys.
System Mode Flowchart
Information pertaining to each function is explained
on the page listed next to the function name.
Functions will appear in the same order they are
shown on this chart.
Model
Selection pg.131
Model Name
Entry pg.133
Model Type
pg. 134
Data Reset
pg. 135
Modulation
Selection pg.136
Data Transfer
pg. 137
130
Accessing the System Mode
Trim Step
pg. 140
1. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
2. Move the power switch to the On (upper) position.
3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the
menu and access the applicable function.
Wing Type
pg. 141
Flap/Spoiler
Lever Selection
pg. 143
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 131
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.4
MODEL SELECTION/MODEL COPY SELECT
The X-378 system offers memory for eight completely
separate models. Therefore, it is possible to have a
mixture of helicopter, airplane and sailplane setups
retained in memory. It is also recommended that the
Model Name Entry function be used in conjunction
“Model” flashing indicates
Model Select Function
Current Model
Name
UP
Model Name
Entry
with each model setup. Another very useful function
of the Model Selection function is the ability to set
one aircraft up several different ways. This is helpful
when multi-task performance is desired.
DN
CH
Copy
Flap/Spoiler
Lever Selection Selection
CLR
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to select the
desired model.
Accessing the Model Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the
System mode.
2. Model should be flashing on the right top portion
of the LCD. If not, press the Up or Down key until
“Model” is displayed and flashing.
3. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will select among each
of the eight models available. Notice that as each
model is selected, its name appears in the left
portion of the LCD.
4. To access the Copy Selection function, press the
Channel key.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
5. To access the Model Name Entry function, press
the Up key.
6. Once the desired model is displayed on the left,
pressing the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
will exit the Model Selection function and establish
the model displayed as the new current model.
Note: When changing from one model type to
another, it is not necessary to use the Type
Selection function. This is done automatically
by the computer.
131
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 132
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
Model Copy Select
The Copy Selection function enables you to copy all
of the settings of the current model to another
model within the same transmitter. This is very
useful when setting up one aircraft several different
ways or when trying an alternative set up of your
current model.
Model number
to be copied to
Model number to
be copied
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Naming
Flap/Spoiler
Lever Select
Press at Model
Select function
to access Copy
function.
Press Increase or
Decrease to select
model number to
be copied to.
Press Clear to copy
current model to model
number shown at the
bottom of the LCD screen.
Accessing the Copy Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move
the transmitter’s power switch to the On position.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “Model”
appears flashing on the top right side of the LCD.
3. The number that appears below the flashing
“Model” is the current model. This is important to
note as only the current model will be the copied or
“from” model. It is imperative to retrieve the proper
current model prior to initiating the copy sequence.
Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the desired
model to be copied.
4. Press the Channel key once. The word “Copy” will
appear at the top left of the screen indicating that
the Copy function has been selected.
5. The large number (1–8) at the bottom center of the
LCD indicate the accepting model.
6. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the
accepting model number.
no longer want to retain in your transmitter’s
memory. Once the copying process has been
completed, the information of the accepting
model is lost and the current model is input
as the new data.
7. Once the desired accepting model is selected,
press the Clear key to complete the Copy Selection
function. The model number at the bottom of the
screen will flash several times indicating that the
model copy function was successful. The “from” or
template model’s name and data will now replace
that of the accepting model.
8. To access the Flap/Spoiler Lever Select function,
press the Down key.
9. To access the Model Naming function, press the
Up key.
10. To exit the Copy Selection function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: Always make sure that the accepting
model is either free of input or one that you
132
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 133
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.5
MODEL NAME ENTRY
The X-378 allows a 3-digit name to be input for each
of the eight models available. The current model will
be displayed in the Normal display when the timer is
not active. You may also find this useful to identify
different aircraft setups.
Model Number
Flashing first digit
indicates Model
Naming function and
current character to
be changed.
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Type
Model Select
Next
Digit
Select
Characters
Clear Current
Character
Accessing the Model Name Entry Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On (upper) position to enter
the Model Setup mode.
2. Use the Model Selection function to select the
model you want to name. (Please refer to the Model
Selection section at this time.)
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the first digit
of the model to be named is flashing on the left
portion of the LCD.
4. The current name will be displayed in the left
portion of the LCD. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will
select the first alphanumeric character.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Note: The character being selected will flash.
5. Press the Channel key to advance the character
selection to the next character.
6. Repeat this procedure until all three characters are
selected.
7. To access the Model Selection function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Type Selection function, press the
Up key.
9. To exit the Model Name Entry function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
133
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 134
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.6
MODEL TYPE SELECTION
The X-378 is capable of performing as a helicopter,
airplane or sailplane radio with full functions
for each.
Current Model Type
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Model Type
Data Reset
Change
Model Type
Model Naming
Accessing the Type Selection Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down keys until “Acro,” “Heli,”
or “Glid” is displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
3. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the
type of model.
134
4. To access the Model Name Entry function, press
the Down key.
5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Up key.
6. To exit the Type Selection function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 135
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.7
DATA RESET
The Data Reset function permits you to reset all the
functions and settings for the current model to
factory conditions. Resetting does not affect the data
already programmed for other models. Be sure to
confirm that you need to reset the data of the
currently indicated model in order to prevent
accidental loss of your valuable data.
Model number to
be reset
UP
DN
CH
CLR
Modulation Select
Model Type
Press to data reset
current model.
Accessing the Data Reset Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch
the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model
Setup mode.
2. Press the Up or Down key until “RESET” appears in
the center of the LCD display. Check the number at
the right side of the display to be sure the model
selected is the model you want to reset.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
3. To reset data, press the Clear key.
4. To access the Type Selection function, press the
Down key.
5. To access the Modulation Selection function, press
the Up key.
6. To exit the Data Reset function, press both the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
135
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 136
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.8
MODULATION SELECT
The Modulation Selection function enables your
X-378 to transmit to a variety of JR receivers that are
already, or may soon be, in existence. You can select
from either of two types of PCM, Z-PCM or S-PCM,
depending on the Central Processing Unit (CPU)
within your receiver or from linear PPM (Pulse
Position Modulation [FM]). Refer to the receiver
compatibility chart below for the correct modulation.
Current Modulation
Data Transfer
Data Reset
Change
Modulation
Reset to SPCM
Modulation
Accessing the Modulation Select Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move
the power switch to the On position to access the
System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPCM,”
“ZPCM,” or “PPM” appears at the top of the LCD.
3. To change among the modulation types, press
either the (+) or (-) keys.
4. Pressing the Clear key will also reset the modulation
selection to the factory preset S-PCM.
5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Down key.
6. To access the Data Transfer function, press the Up key.
7. To exit the Modulation Selection function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: In the normal display, the selected
modulation type will appear in the middle of
the LCD.
Note: When the Data Reset function is used,
the X-378 retains the current modulation
selected for each model. This means that the
modulation type does not change.
Refer to the examples that follow for receiver
compatibility:
TX Modulation
Compatible Receivers
# of Channels &
Brief Description
TX Modulation
Compatible Receivers
# of Channels &
Brief Description
PPM
PPM
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM (FM)
PPM
PPM
PPM
NER-226
NER-228
NER-327x
NER-527x
NER-529x
NER-549
NER-600
NER-610M
NER-700M
6 (micro)
7 (micro)
9 (micro)
Z-PCM
Z-PCM
NER-236
NER-627XZ or
627 “G” series
NER-J329P
NER-910XZ
NER-955
NER-D945
NER-649S
6 (micro)
136
Z-PCM
Z-PCM
S-PCM
S-PCM
S-PCM
10
10
10
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 137
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.9
DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION
The X-378’s Data Transfer function allows for a model
from one X-378 transmitter to be sent to another
X-378 transmitter by using a JR Trainer Cord
(JRPA130 sold separately).
Transmitting Transmitter: It will first be necessary
to select the desired model (1-8) to be transferred to
the receiving transmitter. Access the Model Select
function and select the desired model number to be
transferred (See section 5.4 for information)
Transmit Mode
Trim Step
Modulation Select
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Indicates that the DSC cord
needs to be inserted, and TX
power switch needs to be
turned off.
Press to select Transmit (TX)
or Receive (RX ) modes.
137
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 138
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
Transfer Procedure
1. Both transmitters: With the main power switch off,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
while turning the power switch on to enter the
System mode. The word “TXDSC” will be displayed
and flashing.
2. Press the Channel key to select Transmit (TXDSC) or
Receive (RXDSC) modes.
3. Insert the trainer cord into each transmitter, the
letters DSC will be removed from the screen.
4. Turn off the power switch on each transmitter. The
screen will then change to read either “TXOUT” or
“RXSEL”, depending if transmit or receive modes
were selected.
Model number and program
to be transmitted (sent)
Transmitting Condition (0% not
sent, 100% transfer complete)
Trim Step
Press Clear to begin transmit
or receive procedure.
Modulation Select
Press Channel to select
Transmit (TX) or Receive
(RX) modes.
Note: It is also possible to access the Data
Transfer function as follows:
1. With the main TX power switch off, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously while inserting the
trainer cord into the DSC jack of both transmitters.
(The transmitters will now be in System mode
automatically)
2. Press the Channel key to select transmit (TX) or
receive (RX) modes.
138
3. Both transmitters: In the System mode, press the
Up or Down keys until the words “TXOUT” appears on
the screen. This is the Data Transfer program.
4. Receiving Mode Transmitter (TX to receive
programming): Press the Channel key until the screen
reads “RXSEL.” The word “MODEL” will begin
flashing at the top right portion of the LCD directly
over the current model number selected.
5. Select the receiving model number by pressing the
(+) and (-) keys.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 139
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
“MODEL” flashing indicates current
receiving model number can be selected
using the (+) or (-) keys “MODEL” flashing
indicates current receiving model number
can be selected using the (+) or (-) keys.
Receiving Condition (0% not
started, 100% completed)
DN
UP
CH
CLR
Trim Step
Modulation Select
Press the (+) or (-) keys to select model number to
receive program (1-8) from sending transmitter
Press Channel to select
Transmit or Receive modes
Transmitting Data
7. Press the Clear key to activate the receiving standby mode. The word “RX IN” will now be indicated on
the screen. The receiving transmitter must be in this
stand by mode before the sending transmitter’s Clear
key is pressed, or the date will not be transferred
successfully.
Press the Clear key to put the receiving
transmitter into Standby mode. The
screen will display “RX IN”.
Receiving Condition (0% not
started, 100% completed)
Trim Step
Modulation Select
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Press to select Transmit (TX)
or Receive (RX) modes
Press the Clear key to activate
the receiving Standby mode.
The letters “RX IN” will now be
indicated on the screen.
139
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 140
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
8. Transmitting mode transmitter (TX with program
to be sent): Press the Clear key to start transmitting
data. If the data transfer was successful, both
transmitters will indicate the value 100% on the
display when the transmitting is complete.
If there is a data receiving error during transmitting,
the counter will stop. At this time, press the Clear key
to stop the receiving function. If there is any failure
of transferring, the display will appear as follows:
5.10
When the receiving counter is stopped or you see
“ERROR” indicated, check the trainer cord
connection and condition and try again. Be sure that
the receiving Mode transmitter is in standby
condition first. Then on the transmitting transmitter
press the Clear key to start transmitting.
Note: The Data Transfer function will not work
when the battery alarm is flashing.
TRIM STEP
The Trim Step function allows the user to increase or
decrease the coarseness of the servo movement as
compared to the steps or beeps of the digital trim.
The total servo trim movement remains the same,
(approx. 30degree) regardless of the trim step rate
selected(1~10). The factory default setting for the
trim step function is 4, which means that for each
step (beep) of the digital trim, the servo will move in
digital increments of 4. In other words, if a finer trip
step value of 1 is selected, the servo will move in a
digital increment of 1for each step (beep) of the
digital trim. If a more coarse trim value of 10 is
selected, the servo will more in a digital increment of
10 for each step (beep) of the digital trim lever.
Throttle Cut
Data Transfer
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase or decrease
the trim step rate.
Press Clear to reset to the
factory default 4 position.
Press Channel to select
channel to be adjusted
(Throttle, Aileron, Elevator,
Flap Trim, Lever, Flap Trim
Lever).
140
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 141
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.11
V-TAIL/DUAL-FLAP WING MIXING
The V-Tail/Dual-Flap Wing Mixing function found in
the X-378 allows the user to set the aircraft type as a
V-tail and/or dual-flap wing type.
Function to be adjusted
Condition of function
(Off or On)
Flap Lever Function
Trim Step
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to turn the
functions On and Off.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (Off).
Press the Channel key
to select the V-Tail or
Dual-Flap functions.
V-Tail Mixing
Connect the left ruddervator to the elevator channel
of the receiver and the right ruddervator to the
rudder channel of the receiver. When the V-Tail Mix is
active, the two surfaces will work together to operate
as both elevators and rudders. In the V-tail system,
each servo’s travel is automatically reduced to 75% of
Connect right ruddervator to
rudder channel of receiver.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
the normal travel. Dual rate and exponential
functions still operate normally. If the direction of
the travel is incorrect, the individual servos can be
reversed in the Servo Reversing function. The SubTrim function can also be used to trim each surface
individually.
Connect left ruddervator to
elevator channel of receiver.
141
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 142
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
Dual-Flap Mixing
Connect the left flap servo to the Aux 1 channel of the
receiver and connect the right flap to the Aux 2
channel of the receiver. Check the direction that the
flaps operate. The direction of the flaps should match
the ailerons once the Aileron-to-Flap Mix has been
established in the function mode.
Note: The Aileron-to-Flap Mix will only appear
in the Function mode after the Dual-Flap Mix
has been activated as described below. Use
the Aux 2 and flap levers to adjust the trim of
the flaps as needed. The Aux 2 and flap levers
adjust the position of the two-flap servo in
different ways, as determined by the servo
direction for each servo.
Example: If the Aux 1 and Aux 2 servos are
both in the NORM direction, the Aux 2 lever
will move the servos in the same direction,
while the flap lever will move the servos in
Channel 6 (Aux1) (Flap)
Channel 5 (Gear)
(Aileron 2)
opposite directions. If either of the Aux 1 or 2
channels is reversed, the Aux 2 Lever will now
move the servos in opposite directions, while
the flap lever will now move the servos in the
same direction.
Note: If the 3-position flap switch is selected
to operate the flap function (See section 5.12
Flap Switch Selection), the Aux 2 lever will
become inhibited, and the flap lever will
function as the flap trim Lever.
The Travel Adjust and Servo Reversing functions can
be used to fine tune the flap operation as needed. If
necessary, Sub-Trim can be used individually to adjust
each flap.
This system requires four servos in the wing: one for
each aileron and one for each flap.
Channel 7 (Aux 2) (Aux 2)
Channel 2 (Aileron)
(Aileron 1)
Accessing the V-Tail/Dual Flap Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move the
power switch to the On position to access the System
mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “V.TAIL” appears
at the top of the LCD.
3. To activate the V-Tail Mix function, press either the
(+) or (-) keys.
4. To access the Dual-Flap function, press the Channel
key. Next, press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the DualFlap Mix.
142
4. Press the Clear key to reset either the V-Tail or DualFlap function to the factory default position (Off).
5. To access the Trim Step function, press the Down key.
6. To access the Flap Lever function, press the Up key.
7. To exit the V-Tail/Dual-Flap function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 143
CHAPTER 5: INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane
5.12
FLAP SWITCH SELECT FUNCTION
The Flap Switch Select function allows the flap
channel input to be operated by either the flap lever
(proportional) or the Flap Mix switch (3-Position).
The flap lever can also be used as a trim lever for the
flaps when the Flap Mix switch is selected. When the
flap lever is selected, the function is 100%
proportional from this lever. Selecting the flap lever
and Landing switch (Flap Lever) (FL(+)LS) allows for
the flaps to operate in a three-position manner via
the Flap Mix switch, with the Flap Lever acting as a
trim lever for the flaps.
Note: If the Flap switch is selected (FL+LS)
as the main flap channel input, then the Flap
Lever will operate as a flap trim. This is the
most common Flap switch assignment.
Switch Method Selected
(LEVRS or FL+LS)
Model Select
V-Tail/Dual-Flap Mixing
Press the (+) or (-) key to select
the desired switch to be assigned
(Flap Switch or Flap Lever).
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (LEVRS).
Accessing the Flap Switch Select Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch the
transmitter to the On position to enter the
System mode.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP” appears
at the upper right portion of the LCD with the letters
“LEVRS” in the center of the LCD.
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to assign the desired
switch method (LEVRS or FL+LS)
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4. To access the V-Tail/Wing Mixing function, press
the Down key.
5. To access the Model Select function, press the
Up key.
6. To exit the Flap/Spoiler Select function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
143
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:08 PM
Page 144
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.1
FUNCTION MODE
To enter the Function mode, switch the transmitter
power switch to the On position. Press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously, and the display will
show the last active program. Pressing either the
Up or Down key then scrolls through the functions
one by one, according to the Function Mode
Flowchart shown below. Once the appropriate
function is displayed, changes can be made by
pressing the (+) or (-) keys. To select another channel
of a particular function, press the Channel key. If you
transfer to a different function that is channel
selectable, the display will show the same channel.
For example, if you are adjusting the dual rate of the
elevator and you change to the Exponential function,
the channel remains elevator. The Function mode is
the most often used system to input data.
Function Mode Flowchart
Information pertaining to each function is explained
on the page listed next to the function name.
Functions will appear in the same order they are
shown on this chart.
Servo reversing
pg. 145
Dual Rate
pg. 146
Exponential
pg. 148
Sub-Trim
pg. 149
Travel Adjust
pg. 150
Elevator to-FlapMixing pg. 151
Aileron-to-Flap Mixing
(only if Dual-Flap setting
is active) pg. 153
Differential Aileron
Mixing pg. 155
Flap-to-Elevator
Mixing pg. 156
Flap-to-Aileron
Mixing pg. 159
Aileron-to-Rudder
Mixing pg. 162
Accessing the Function Mode
1. Move the power switch to the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the
menu and access the applicable function.
Crow/Camber
Mixing pg. 164
Dual-Flap Trim
pg. 166
Programmable Mixing
1-6 pg. 167
Fail-Safe (only visible
when PCM Modulation
is selected) pg. 171
Trainer Function
pg. 175
Timer Function
pg. 177
144
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 145
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.2
SERVO REVERSING
The Reverse Switch function is an electronic means
of reversing the throw of a given channel (servo). All
seven channels of the X-378 offer reversible servo
direction. This will ease setup during the servo
installation into your aircraft.
Channel to be
adjusted
Dual-Rate Function
Timer Function
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to change the
servo direction.
Press Clear to reset
to the factory
normal direction.
Press Channel to change to the
desired channel to be adjusted.
Accessing the Reverse Switch Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “REV.”
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Using your transmitter’s control sticks, switches
and potentiometers, move the control surfaces of
your aircraft. Note the travel direction of each of the
corresponding control surfaces.
5. After you have determined which channel(s) need
to have the throw directions reversed, use the
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Channel key to call up the appropriate channel. Press
either the (+) or (-) keys to change the travel
direction of the servo. Pressing the Clear key returns
the travel direction to normal.
7. You can observe the change in the travel direction
by moving the appropriate control at this time.
8. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Dual Rate function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Reverse Switch function, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
145
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 146
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.3
DUAL RATES
Dual Rates are available for the aileron, elevator and
rudder channels of your R/C aircraft. There is also an
automatic dual rate setting to link your aileron,
elevator, and rudder dual rates to the flight model
switch. This Automatic Dual-Rate function is discussed
in a separate section that follows. Dual-Rates may be
defined as the ability to vary the travel or throw rate of
a servo from a switch. Due to the differing travel rates,
you will find that the sensitivity of the control either
increases or decreases accordingly. A higher rate, or
travel, yields a higher overall sensitivity. You may find
it easier to think of the Dual-Rate function as double-
rates or half-rates.The Dual-Rate function works in
conjunction with the Exponential function to allow
you to precisely tailor your control throws. You may
want to consult the section defining exponential for
further information.
The amount of travel is adjustable from 0-125% in 1%
increments. The factory setting, or default value, for
both the 0 and 1 switch positions is 100%. Either
switch position may be selected as the low or high rate
by placing the switch in the desired position and
adjusting the value accordingly.
D/R switch
position (0 or 1)
Channel to be adjusted
Exponential
Press (+) or (-) to increase
or decrease D/R values.
Servo Reversing
Press Clear to reset
to factory default
settings (100%).
Press Channel to select
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder, or
Auto D/R to be adjusted.
Accessing the Dual-Rate Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
on position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “D/R” appears
in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
(aileron, elevator, rudder or automatic Dual-Rates)
appears.
5. Select the switch position for which you want to
adjust the rate. The number to the upper right of the
current rate value on the display indicates the
current position of the dual rate switch for the
146
channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or a 1 will
be shown, corresponding to the position of the
switch. To select the opposite switch position, move
the appropriate dual rate switch to the opposite
position. The number that appears above the current
rate value reflects the change.
6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch
position that you have just selected. To decrease the
throw rate, press the (-) key. To increase the throw
rate, press the (+) key. The adjustable rate is from 0125% for each switch position and channel.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 147
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Dual-Rate Function (continued)
Note: You can observe the servo changes by
moving the respective stick while increasing
or decreasing the values. The control changes
accordingly. To clear the Dual-Rate for the
respective channel and switch position, press
the Clear key. After the dual rates have been
dialed in to your satisfaction, we suggest
that you begin to adjust the exponential
values. Refer to the Exponential section for
more information.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
7. To access the Servo Reversing function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Exponential function, press the
Up key.
9. To exit the Dual-Rate function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
147
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 148
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.4
EXPONENTIAL
Programmable exponential adjustments are offered
on the aileron, elevator, and rudder channels of your
R/C aircraft. Exponential is a function that allows you
to tailor the response rate of the stick controls. The
purpose of exponential is to reduce the sensitivity in
the middle portion of stick movement, while still
allowing full travel at the end of the stick movement.
In other words, the end result (travel) remains the
same, although exponential changes the rate at
which it achieves this travel.
The adjustable range of the Exponential Function is
from 0-100%. Zero percent (0%) is linear stick control
which means that the response rate is equal
throughout the stick control. 100% is full
exponential. The larger the exponential value, the
less servo action or sensitivity you will notice around
the neutral setting.
Note: The Exponential function operates in
conjunction with the Dual-Rate function. It is
imperative to understand the Dual-Rate
function prior to adjusting the exponential
values. Exponential may be selected for either
the high or low rate or both.
Dual-Rate switch
position to be
adjusted
Channel to
be adjusted
Sub-Trim Function
Dual-Rate Function
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
increase or decrease the
exponential values.
Press Clear to reset
values to the factory
default position.
Press to select Aileron, Elevator, or
Rudder position to be adjusted.
Accessing the Exponential Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
access the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “EXP” (Exponential) appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
(aileron, elevator or rudder) appears.
5. Select the switch position for which you want to
adjust the exponential rate. The number directly
above the exponential value on the display indicates
the current position of the dual rate switch for the
channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or 1 will be
shown, corresponding to the position of the switch.
To select the opposite switch position, move the
appropriate Dual-Rate or Flight mode switch to the
opposite position. The number that appears directly
148
above the Exponential value will reflect the change.
6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch
position that you have just selected. To increase the
exponential rate, press the (+) key. As stated
previously, the adjustable rate is from linear (0%)
to100% for each switch position and channel.
Note: Exponential is an acquired feel. As
such, it may take several test flights to
achieve the proper amount of exponential
that fits your flying style.
8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Up key.
10. To exit the Exponential Function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 149
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.5
SUB-TRIM
The Sub-Trim Adjustment function allows you to
electronically fine-tune the centering of your servos.
Individually adjustable for all seven channels with a
range of ±125% (+/-30 degrees servo travel), the subtrims can be set for the same neutral settings for
each model stored in the transmitter’s memory. The
Sub-Trim functions provides precise servo arm
neutral positioning if rotating the servo arm will not
allow the desired servo arm position.
Sub-Trim Value
Channel to be adjusted
Travel Adjust
Trim value
Exponential
Press Clear to reset
to the factory default
settings (0%).
Press to select
desired channel to
be adjusted (1-7).
Accessing Sub-Trim Adjustment Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. To Access the Function mode, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SUBTRIM”
appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired
channel appears.
5. Press the (+) or (-) key to establish the desired
amount and direction of Sub-Trim.
Note: A (+) or (-) symbol appears to the left of
the sub-trim value to indicate the direction of
sub-trim input.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Caution: Do not use excessive Sub-Trim
adjustments since it is possible to overrun
your servo’s maximum travel if it is off-center.
Remember that it is a trim convenience
function. It is not intended to take the place
of the proper mechanical trim adjustments
that are necessary on any R/C model. An
offset servo will also produce a differential effect.
6. To access the Exponential function, press the
Down key.
7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the Up key.
8. To exit the Sub-Trim function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
149
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 150
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.6
TRAVEL ADJUST
The purpose of travel adjust, also known as endpoint
adjustment or adjustable travel volume, is to offer
you precise servo control deflection in either
direction of servo operation. The X-378 offers travel
adjust for all seven channels. The travel adjust range
is from 0-150% (0 degrees to 60 degrees) from
neutral, or center, and it can be adjusted for each
direction individually. The factory default (data reset)
value is 100% for each direction of servo travel.
Channel to be
adjusted
Travel direction to be adjusted
(left/Right, Up/Down, etc)
UP
Elevator-to-Flap
Mixing
DN
CH
CLR
Sub-Trim values
Sub-Trim
Press Clear to reset
to factory default
settings (100 %).
Press Channel to select the
desired channel to be adjusted.
Accessing the Travel Adjust Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRAVL”
appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel
appears.
5. Move the appropriate control stick (lever, switch, etc)
to the right or left of center to the direction of travel
you want to adjust. An arrow to the right of the travel
adjust value will reflect the current position to be
adjusted. Using our example above, if the aileron stick
is moved to the left, a left-facing arrow will appear to
the left of the travel adjust value on the LCD screen.
150
6. After the control stick or switch is placed in the
direction of travel to be adjusted, press the (+) or (-)
key until the proper amount of servo travel is shown
on the lower right side of the LCD. Press the (+) key
to increase the amount of servo travel. Press the (-)
key to decrease the amount of servo travel.
7. Follow the same procedure for the remaining
channels.
8. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Down key.
9. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,
press the Up key.
10. To exit the Travel Adjust function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 151
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.7
ELEVATOR-TO-FLAP MIXING
When the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is active
and a value of flaps is input, the flaps will be
deflected each time the elevator stick is used. The
actual flap movement is adjustable for both up and
down elevator. The most frequently used application
is up elevator/down flaps. When used in this manner,
the aircraft pitches up much more quickly than
normal and is helpful in tight thermal turns.
Up/Down arrows change
when the elevator stick
is moved, and position
to be adjusted.
Mixing Value
Mix Switch Position
(up=ON, center or low
position displays OFF).
Aileron-to-Flap Mixing
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase or decrease
the mixing value for
each position.
Travel Adjust
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (0%).
Press the Channel key to access
the switch selection function.
Note:Only the elevator input indicated by the
LCD will be cleared. For example, if the Up
arrow were displayed and Clear were pushed,
the Down arrow value would still be retained
by the transmitter. In order to change
elevator operating direction, move the
elevator control stick in the direction you
want to mix with flaps. Using our example,
we would input down elevator. The down
arrow would be displayed at the lower left
portion of the LCD. Our mixing value would
also change to reflect our input.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
If the Flap-Mixing switch selected is not in the on
position, the position indicator on the LCD will
change from “ON” to “OFF.” This indicates that the
Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is not currently
active. Although the current mixing value will still be
displayed, it will not be possible to alter this value
until the selected mix switch is returned to the On
position. Refer to the Elevator-to-Flap Switch
Activation section for more information.
151
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 152
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “ELEV-FLAP”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
Note: If the selected Flap-Mixing Switch is
not in the uppermost position, the position
indicator will read “OFF.” The selected FlapMixing switch must be in the on position in
order to make adjustments to the flapmixing value.
4. Move the elevator stick in the direction you want
to mix with flaps.
Note: The position indicator will reflect this
change by replacing the up arrow with a
down arrow or vice-versa. A Down arrow
indicates up elevator, and an Up arrow
indicates down elevator (The arrow position
indicates stick position, not elevator direction.)
5. Press the (+) or (-) key to increase or decrease the
amount of flaps to be mixed. If you want to reverse
the flap travel, press the Clear key, bringing the
mixing value to the factory default (0%), and increase
the value using the opposite key (+) or (-) from the
key originally selected.
6. Once you have adjusted the first mixing position
(Up or Down), place the elevator stick in the
opposite direction and follow Step 5 above to adjust
the second elevator mixing value.
7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Up key.
9. To exit the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Elevator-to-Flap Mixing Switch Selection
The X-378 allows for the use of either of two switches
(three switch positions) for the activation of the
Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function. You can also
enable the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function so that it
remains active at all times. The Elevator-to-Flap
Mixing function is generally used for multi-task
duration, speed, distance, and slope aerobatics. You
may want to use different mix values for up and
down elevator positions.
LCD Display
Description
ON
MIX
The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function will remain on at all times.
The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is activated/inhibited by
the Rudder D/R/Mix switch located on the upper rear of the Tx.
The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is only activated when the
flap switch is in the lower (launch) position.
The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is only activated when the
flap switch is in the upper (reflex) position.
FLP-D
FLP-U
Accessing the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing Switch Selection
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “ELEV-FLAP”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch
Selection function.
5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the desired
switch to assign the mix to.
152
6. Press the Channel key again to return to the
Elevator-to-Flap function.
7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function,
press the Up key.
9. To exit the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 153
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.8
AILERON-TO-FLAP MIXING (Dual-Flap Activated in System Mode)
The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is only
applicable when the Dual-Flap Trim function is
activated in the System mode. For information on
how to activate the Dual-Flap Trim function, refer to
the V-Tail/Dual-Flap function. The purpose of this
mixing function is to mix the ailerons with the flaps
so that the flaps will operate in conjunction with the
ailerons. In effect, this will increase the amount of
aileron control surface area available. The amount of
mix is adjustable; thus, you can tailor the aileron
response to fit your flying style. The flap lever on the
front right face of the X-378 transmitter will trim the
flap channel (Aux1) as ailerons. The digital aileron
trim lever will trim the ailerons (aileron channel). The
digital aileron trim has no effect on the flaps.
Note: If differential mixing is being used, the
flaps will also operate differentially according
to the value input in the differential mixing.
This mixing will also include the aileron
operating value when programmable mixing
1 or 2 is used with the ailerons. If the Aileronto-Flap Mixing activation switch is in the Off
position, the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing would
be inhibited. Off would replace the On switch
indication in our example.
Mixing Value
Switch Position
Aileron
Differential
Elevator-to-Flap
Press the Clear key to
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
reset to the factory
increase or decrease the
default position (0%).
mixing value for each position.
Press the Channel key to
access the switch
selection function.
Accessing the Aileron to Flap Mixing Function
1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys move
the power switch to the On position.
2. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-FLAP”
is displayed in the center portion of the LCD.
3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to change the value
of the mix. A (+) or (-) sign will appear to the left of
the current value. This indicates the direction of
travel. If the travel is in the wrong direction, increase
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
the value in the opposite direction. Normal
application is that the flaps travel the same direction
as the ailerons.
4. After the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing values have been
adjusted, you can select the desired mixing switch to
activate the Aileron-to-Flap Mix. You can also choose
to leave the Mixing function on at all times (factory
default).
153
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 154
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Aileron-to-Flap Mixing Activation Selection
The purpose of the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing Activation
Selection is to enable you to select a switch and/or
switch position that will activate the Aileron-to-Flap
Mixing function. You can also choose to leave the
Aileron-to-Flap Mix active at all times.
LCD Display
Description
ON
MIX
The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function will remain on at all times.
The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder D/R/Mix
switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.
The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch
is in the lower (launch) position.
The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the
upper and lower (reflex) positions. The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is
in the center position. This mix is often used with Launch mode (preset) also for
aerobatics, speed and distance tasks.
FLP-D
F-U/D
Acessing the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing Switch Selection
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2.Access the Function mode by press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-FLAP”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch
Selection function.
5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the desired
switch to assign the mix to.
154
6. Press the Channel key again to return to the
Aileron-to-Flap function.
7. To access the Elevator-to-Flap function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Aileron Differential function, press
the Up key.
9. To exit the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 155
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.9
DIFFERENTIAL AILERON MIXING
The X-378 transmitter offers aileron differential.
Differential ailerons are used to tailor the flight
control system to a particular aircraft. Because the
downward travel of the aileron creates more drag
than does the upward travel, it is necessary to reduce
the amount of down travel for each aileron
electronically. This drag may very well produce a
yawing tendency in your aircraft. As yaw is
undesirable in most R/C aircraft, it is best to correct
for this common flight tendency. Aileron differential
overcomes the yaw as it reduces the downward travel
of the ailerons.
Note: When the Dual-Flap Trim function is
active, the differential value will also apply to
the flapperons. Differential may also be
obtained by using the Travel Adjust function.
Differential Value
Flap-to-Elevator
Mixing
Aileron-to-Flap
Mixing
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase the value
(range 0-100%).
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (0%).
Accessing the Differential Aileron Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “DIFF.”
appears in the upper left corner of the LCD. Press the
(+) or (-) key until the desired amount of differential
is established. The operating range for differential is
0% (NORM) to 100% (SPLIT). The following diagrams
may ease the understanding of the Differential
Aileron Mixing function:
4. To access the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function,
press the Down key.
5. To access the Flap-to-Elevator function, press the
Up key.
6. To exit the Aileron Differential Mixing function,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
If left at 0%, the ailerons maintain equal travel for
both sides. That is, there will not be any differential
whatsoever. If set at 50%, the aileron that is lowered
travels 50% or half, as far as the upward aileron. If
adjusted to 100%, you achieve what is commonly
referred to as a “split.” This means that the only
aileron that moves is the aileron that travels upward.
The aileron that normally drops remains stationary.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
155
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 156
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.10
FLAP TO ELEVATOR MIXING
When the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is active
and a value for elevator is input, the elevator will be
deflected accordingly each time the flaps are used.
The actual elevator movement is adjustable for both
up and down flaps. Thus, the elevator is used to
eliminate the pitch up or pitch down tendency when
the flaps are raised or lowered. This function also
includes a mixing offset to redefine the neutral
position of the elevator channel. The effect of the
offset is to change the point at which the mixing
actually begins.
Note: To change the flap operating direction
to be adjusted (up or down), move the
selected flap activation switch to the second
activation position. The arrow on the LCD
will change from an up to a down arrow or
vise versa to indicate the current flap
position to be adjusted.
The X-378 allows for the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing
to be left on at all times or turned on and off by a
switch position. For information, refer to the Flapto-Elevator Mixing Activation Selection section.
If the elevator mixing activation switch is in the Off
position, the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function would
be inhibited. Off would replace the percentage (0%)
in our example. This mix generally will be used as
the launch preset trim for the elevator. You can also
adjust preset trim for reflex.
Flap direction to be adjusted
Mixing Value
Activation switch position (On or Off)
Flap-to-Aileron Mix
Aileron Differential
156
Press the Channel
key to access the
switch selection
function.
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to increase or decrease
the mixing value for
each position.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position (0%).
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 157
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously while the power
switch is in the On position.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “FLAPELEV” appears in the center portion of your LCD.
Note: If “OFF” appears in the lower left
portion of the LCD, move the flap switch to
the opposite position from the one it
currently occupies. If “OFF” is still on the
LCD, move the mixing switch.
4. Move the Flap Mix switch until the desired flap
position to be adjusted is displayed on the LCD (up
or down arrow)
Note: As the flap switch is moved, the Up
and Down Arrows at the lower left of the LCD
will change to the appropriate flap operating
direction.
5. Press either the (+) or (-) key to increase or
decrease the amount of elevator input. If the elevator
is moving in the wrong direction, i.e., opposite of the
direction you want to mix with the flaps, Change the
current mixing value from (+) to (-) or vise versa to
change the mixing direction.
Flap-to-Elevator Mixing Activation Selection
The purpose of the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing
Activation Selection function is to enable you to
select a switch and/or switch position that will
activate the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function. You
can also choose to leave the Flap-to-Elevator Mix
active at all times.
LCD Display
Description
ON
MIX
The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function will remain on at all times.
The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder D/R/Mix
switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.
The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch
is in the lower (launch) position.
The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the
upper and lower (reflex) positions. The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is
in the center position.
FLP-D
F-U/D
Accessing the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing Switch Selection
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP-ELEV”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch
Selection function.
5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the desired
switch to assign the mix to.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
6. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flapto-Elevator function.
7. To access the Aileron Differential function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Flap-to-Aileron function, press the
Up key.
9. To exit the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
157
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 158
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Activation Switch Offset
The offset feature redefines the neutral position of
the selected mix activation switch. The effect of this
is to change the point where mixing actually begins
to take place relative to the switch position selected.
1. Press the Channel key until “OFFSET” appears in
the center of the LCD.
2. Move the assigned mix switch to the position that
you want to establish as the starting point for the mix.
3. Press the Clear key to store the offset value. The
158
offset value will generally be + or - 171, depending
on the mix switch position.
4. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flapto-Elevator function.
5. To access the Aileron Differential function, press
the Down key.
6. To access the Flap-to-Aileron function, press the
Up key.
7. To exit the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 159
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.11
FLAP-TO-AILERON MIXING
The purpose of the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is
to allow you to couple the ailerons to the flaps. This
will enable you to droop the ailerons with the flaps
to increase lift. If you should find it necessary to
redefine the neutral position of the ailerons relative
to the mix switch position,
a mixing offset is also provided.
mix, if utilized. The offset position for the
Flap-to-Aileron Mix can also be altered
as needed.
In order to use the Flap-to-Aileron function, it will be
necessary to employ one servo per aileron and at
least one on the flaps.
Note: The offset value for the Flap-to-Aileron
Mixing function will initially be the same as
the point established for the Flap-to-Elevator
This mixing system will include the flap operating
value when programmable mixing 1 or 2 is applied to
the flaps.
Current Mixing Value
Aileron-to-Rudder Mix
Flap-to-Elevator Mix
Press to
access the
Switch
Selection
function.
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to set the
mixing value, or to
select the switch
activation.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the factory
default position.
Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Activation Selection
The purpose of the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Activation
Selection function is to enable you to select a switch
and/or switch position that will activate the Flap-to-
Aileron Mixing function. You can also choose to
leave the Flap-to-Aileron active at all times.
LCD Display
Description
ON
MIX
The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function will remain on at all times.
The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder D/R/Mix
switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.
The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch
is in the lower (launch) position.
The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the
upper and lower (reflex) positions. The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is
in the center position.
FLP-D
F-U/D
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
159
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 160
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Switch Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP-AILE”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch
Selection function.
5. Press the (+) or (- ) keys to select the desired
switch to assign the mix to.
6. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flapto-Aileron function.
7. To access the Flap-to-Elevator function, press the
Down key.
8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mix function,
press the Up key.
9. To exit the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
Note: If the Aileron Mixing activation switch
is in the Off position, the Flap-to-Aileron
mixing would be inhibited.
Adjusting the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously while the power
switch is in the On position.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP-AILE”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
Note: If “OFF” appears in the lower left
portion of the LCD, move the flap switch to
the opposite position from the one it
currently occupies. If “OFF” is not replaced
with “ON,” repeat this procedure with the
mixing switch.
160
4. Press either the (+) or (-) key to increase the
amount of aileron to be mixed with flaps. Moving the
flap switch (located on the front left face of the
transmitter) will now move both the ailerons and
the flaps.
5. After the mixing percentage is input, select the
switch and/or position for which you want to activate
the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function. You can also
choose to leave the Mixing function enabled (ON) at
all times. To select the mixing activator, press the
Channel key. Your display will appear as follows:
6. Press either the (+) or (-) key to select among the
mixing activators. For more information on the
mixing activators refer to the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing
Activation Selection section.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 161
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Activation Switch Offset
The offset feature redefines the neutral position of
the selected mix activation switch. The effect of this
is to change the point where mixing actually begins
to take place relative to the switch position selected.
1. Press the Channel key until “OFFSET” appears in
the center of the LCD.
2. Move the assigned mix switch to the position
that you want to establish as the starting point for
the mix.
3.Press the Clear key to store the offset value. The
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
offset value will generally be + or - 171, depending
on the mix switch position.
4. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flapto-Aileron function.
5. To access the Aileron to Rudder Mix function,
press the Up key.
6. To access the Flap-to-Elevator function, press the
Down key.
7. To exit the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
161
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 162
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.12
AILERON-TO-RUDDER MIXING
This form of mixing is designed so that when input
to the aileron stick is given, the rudder servo will also
move, eliminating the need to coordinate these
controls manually. When adjusting, if an opposite
mixing direction of the rudder servo is required,
simply press the (+) or (-) keys to change the mixing
value from a + to - or a - to a +. This will reverse the
mixing direction of the rudder from its original
direction. The switch used to activate this mix can
also be selected as explained below. The factory
default mix switch for the Aileron-to-Rudder Mix
function is Rudder D/R/ Mix switch located at the
upper right side of the transmitter.
Mixing Value
Mix/Switch Position
Crow/Camber Mixing
Flap-to-Aileron Mixing
Press Channel to
access the mixing
switch assignment
function.
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to adjust the
mixing value, or to
select the mix
switch assignment.
Press the Clear
key to reset to the
factory default
position.
Accessing the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the
Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-RUDD”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
Note: If the current mixing switch is not in
the on position, the position indicator will
read “OFF.” The current mixing switch must
be in the On position in order to make adjustments to the Aileron-to-Rudder mixing value.
162
4. With the current mix switch On, press the (+) or (-)
key to increase or decrease the amount of rudder to
be mixed with aileron. If you want to reverse the
rudder mix direction, press the Clear key, bringing the
mixing value to the factory default (0%) and increase
the value using the opposite key (+) or -) from the
key originally selected.
5. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,
press the Down key.
6. To access the Landing Mode function, press the
Up key.
7. To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously..
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 163
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Assigning the Mixing Activation Switch
The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing program can be
turned on and off using several different assignable
switch options.
The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is in the
center position.
This mix is often used with launch mode (preset)
also for aerobatics, speed and distance tasks.
LCD Display
Description
ON
MIX
The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function will remain on at all times.
The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder
D/R/Mix switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.
The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch
is in the lower (launch) position.
The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the
upper and lower (reflex) positions.
FLP-D
F-U/D
Assigning the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Switch Function
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-RUDD”
appears in the center portion of your LCD.
4. Press the Channel key to access the switch
assignment function.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
5.Press the (+) or (-) key to select the desired
switch/function to activate the Aileron-to-Rudder
Mixing function.
6.To access the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function,
press the Down key.
7.To access the Crow/Camber Mixing function, press
the Up key.
8.To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
163
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 164
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.13
Crow/Camber Mixing
The purpose of this function is to allow the ailerons
to be used as spoilers in conjunction with the
normal spoilers and flaps. You can also choose to
include a preset amount of up or down elevator to
avoid pitching up or down when the crow/camber
system is active. This system is activated using the
gear switch on the top left corner of the transmitter
and increasing the spoiler (throttle) stick. This will
deploy the crow/camber system as speed brakes.
Two different setups are available for the
crow/camber mixing function, one for each position
of the crow on and off switch. A mixing offset is also
available to redefine the neutral position of the
spoiler system.
Channel to be
adjusted
Mix Value
GEAR switch position (0 or 1)
Dual-Flap Trim
Aileron-to-Rudder Mix
Press the (+) or (-)
keys to set the desired
mixing value.
Press the Clear key to
reset the mix value or
to set the spoiler
offset position.
Press to select the desired
channel or offset to be adjusted.
164
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 165
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Crow/Camber Mixing Function
1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPOI”
appears in the center left portion of the LCD.
4. Place the crow/camber switch (GEAR) in the
position you want to be the On position (0 or 1).
5. Press the Channel key until the channel on which
you want to set the value appears to the right of “SPOI.”
Note: The switch position appears just to the
right of this display. Press either the (+) or (-)
key to increase or decrease the individual
mix values for each of these channels. Press
the Channel key again until all channel values
are input. Normal operation is ailerons up,
flaps down.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Setting the Spoiler Offset Position
If you want to use the spoiler offset:
6. Press the Channel key until “OFFSET” appears in
the center portion of the LCD.
7. Move the spoiler (throttle) stick to the desired
offset position (usually full low stick) and press the
Clear key. The offset is now saved. The normal
position is spoiler (throttle) stick low.
8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,
press the Down key.
9. To access the Dual-Flap Trim function, press the
Up key.
10. To exit the Crow/Camber Mixing function, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.
165
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 166
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.14
Dual-Flap Trim (when Dual-Flap is selected in the System mode)
The purpose of the Dual-Flap Trim function is to
allow the trimming of the two flap channels (Aux 1
and Aux 2). Two separate trim Levers are accessible
in the Dual-Flap Trim function. The Aux 2 Lever,
located on the front Left face of the transmitter,
adjusts both flap control surfaces up/down in unison
(L6 on the LCD). The Flap Lever, located on the front
right face of the transmitter, trims the flaps in
opposite directions as ailerons (L5 on the LCD).
Note: The Dual-Flap Trim function must be
active. Also, the aileron ratchet trim has no
effect on the flaps.
In order for “L5” to appear on the LCD, the Flap Trim
activation must be selected to FL+LS in the System
mode in addition to the Dual-Flap Mixing function.
Refer to the Flap Channel Input Selection and Wing
Mixing sections respectively (System mode) for more
information.
Switch to be adjusted
Programmable Mix #1
Crow/Camber Mix
Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the mix
switches on and off.
Press Channel to select L5
or L6 switch to be adjusted.
Accessing the Dual-Flap Trim Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously while the power
switch is On.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRIM”
appears in the center portion of the LCD below the
Dual-Flap Trim icon.
4. Press the (+) or (-) key to activate the L6 trim. The
display will change to indicate “ON .”
5. If the Dual-Flap Trim function is active and FL+LS
is selected (System mode), press the Channel key
until L5 is displayed.
166
6. Once L5 is indicated, press either the (+) or (-) key
to activate the trim feature. The display will change to
“ON.” Now the Aux 2 and flap levers may be used to
make in-flight adjustments to these control surfaces.
7. To access the Crow/Camber Mixing function, press
the Down key.
8. To access Programmable Mix #1, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Dual-Flap Trim function, press the Down
and Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 167
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.15
PROGRAMMABLE MIXING 1-6
The X-378 offers six programmable mixes to be used
for any number of different purposes. This function
allows mixing any one channel to any other channel
to make the aircraft easier to fly. This mix can remain
on at all times, or be switched on and off in flight
using a number of different switches.
Mix numbers 1-4 are of the standard variety, in that
the digital trim for the master channel only affect the
master channel, and not the slave channel. Mix
numbers 5 and 6 are of the “Trim Include” variety.
These mixes are used any time the mix you are
performing requires the Slave channels trim position
to be varied when the master channel’s digital trim
position is varied. An example for this type of mix
would be when dual-elevator or dual-aileron servos
are used, and connected to two separate channels of
the system, rather than using a single channel with a
Y-Harness.
Each channel of this radio is identified by an
abbreviated name. The chart below indicates the
Programmable Mix #2
channel and its corresponding abbreviation. The
channel name appearing first is known as the
“master channel” or the channel to which you want
to mix. The second number is known as the “slave
channel” or the channel that is being mixed into the
master channel. For example, “AILE-RUDD” would
indicate Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing. Each time the
aileron stick is moved, the aileron will deflect, and
the rudder will automatically move in the direction
and to the value input. Mixing is proportional, so
small inputs of the master channel will produce
small outputs of the slave channel. Each
programmable mix has a mixing “offset.” The
purpose of the mixing offset is to re-define the
neutral position of the slave channel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
THRO
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
AIL
FLAP
AUX 2
Spoiler
Left Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Right Aileron
Left Flap
Right Flap
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
select the master channel.
Flap Lever Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
SP01
AILE
ELEV
RUDD
GEAR
AUX 1
AUX 2
Spoiler
Left Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Right Aileron
Left Flap
Right Flap
167
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 168
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “MIX 1”
appears in the upper right portion of the LCD.
Slave channel
Master Channel
Stick position to be
adjusted
Mixing Value
Mix Switch Position
Programmable Mix #2
Flap Lever Adjustment
Function
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
adjust the mixing values
and to select the desired
mix activation switch.
Press the Channel key to move through the
mixing functions (master/slave channel, mix
switch activation, offset value).
Selecting the Master and Slave Mixing Channels
4. Press the (+) key to activate the mix. Press the (+)
or (-) keys again to select the master channel.
5. Press the Channel key to move the cursor to the
Slave channel position.
6. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the slave channel.
7. Press the Channel key once. The display will
continue to show the current mixing channels at the
top of the LCD, but will now have a flashing arrow at
the bottom left of the LCD to indicate the current
stick position (master) to be adjusted.
Setting the Mixing Values
8. While holding the master stick in the direction you
want to mix, press the (+) or (-) keys to increase or
decrease the mixing value for the slave channel. The
168
Press the Clear key to
store the offset value
or to reset the mixing
values to the factory
default positions.
value at the lower right of the LCD will change to
display the current mix value selected. Next, hold the
master stick to the other side to adjust the mix for the
other direction.
Note: The current mixing switch must be
in the On position for the mixing values to
be adjusted.
Setting the Mixing Switch Activation
9. Press the Channel key once again. The display will
have SW ON indicated at the center portion of the
LCD with the word “ON” located in the upper right of
the LCD. This indicates the current switch assignment
to activate this mix. “ON” indicates that this mix is
currently selected to always be active (ON).
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 169
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function (continued)
The mix switch options for Mixes #1, 4, and 5 are:
ON
MIX
FLP-D:
FLP-U
Always On
Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch
Activated in the down position of the Flap Mix switch
Activated in the up position of the Flap Mix switch
The Mix switch options for Mixes # 2, 3, and 6 are
ON
Always On
MIX
Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch
BTFYO:
Activated in the forward position of the Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)
BTFY1
Activated in the rearward position of the Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)
Setting the Mixing Channel Offset
9. Press the Channel key once again. The display will
show the current mixing channels at the top of the
LCD, with the word “OFFSET” at the center of the
LCD. The value to the lower right is the mixing offset
neutral point, currently 0.
10. Hold the master stick in the position you want to
make the neutral point of the slave channel and push
the Clear key. A new value with a (+) or (-) sign will
appear. This is the new neutral point for the slave
channel (point that the mix is activated). To reset the
value back to 0, move the master stick back to the
center position and press the Clear key to reset.
Note: The master channel trim must be
centered for this to reset to 0 using the
Clear key.
11. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
to exit the Programmable Mix function.
Note: With a little practice, programmable
mixing will become easier compared with the
first time you try it. The best part of a
computer radio is that if you don’t like
something, you can change it. Mixing is only
limited by your imagination.
Setting Mixing Value
The X-378 transmitter has six multi-purpose
programmable mixes available. For these mixing
operations, first determine the mix type required
(standard 1-4, or trim include 5-6), master and slave
channels, offset and operating switch settings, if
necessary, and then adjust the mixing value.
For setting mixing value, move and hold the master
channel control (up, down, left or right) and set the
slave servo mix value by pressing either the (+) or (-)
keys. To reverse direction of the slave mix, press the
opposite of the (+) or (-) keys until the value of mix is
set in the reverse direction. If the reference of the
offset point is moved (see section below), the slave
channel’s direction will change from that position.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Setting the Mix Offset Position
Any position of the master channel can be used as a
reference (starting) point for mixing. This is useful for
channels that have no neutral position. With this
function, you can use program mixing with respect to
an arbitrary position of the lever/switch. To set the
offset position, put the master channel at the desired
position and press the Clear key. The position is
stored in the memory and its offset value from the
neutral position is indicated numerically on the
display. Once this offset point has been set, the
mixing value at the offset position is now set to zero.
169
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 170
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Functions Related to Program Mixing
The functions related to the operating range of the
master channel are as follows:
Mixing 1 and 2
Selecting FLAP (Aux 1) for the master channel:
When the slave channel is aileron (AILE), its mixing
operation is affected by aileron differential settings.
When the slave channel is flap (FLAP), its mixing
operation is affected by Flap-to-Aileron Mix setting.
When Dual-Flap setting is active and the slave
channel is AUX 2, its mixing operation is affected by
aileron differential settings.
Mixing 3 and 4
When the master channel is throttle (spoiler), its
mixing operation is affected by the spoiler trim settings.
Trim Include Mixes 5 and 6
Programmable Mixes 5 and 6 offer mixing with the
Trim Include function. The Trim Include function is
automatically activated when mixes 5 and 6 are used.
Mixes 5 and 6 with Trim Include
Whenever the master channel is aileron, elevator,
rudder or throttle, you have the option of allowing
the master channel’s trim lever to mix into the slave
channel. As stated previously, the Mixing with Trim
function is always activated in mixes 5 and 6. You
can observe the operation by watching the slave
channel while moving the master channel’s trim lever.
Note: If you have not yet entered values for
the mixing percentages, the slave channel
will remain stationary. Also, if the mixing
percentages are very low, the movement of
the slave channel from the trim lever is also
very small.
Include Mixing
The Include Mixing function allows other
programmed mixing values for the master channel.
As stated previously, the Include Mixing function is
always activated in Mixes 5 and 6.
Mix 6’s operating value also now includes the
operating value from Mix 5’s master channel
(aileron). By moving the aileron control stick, Mix 5
has the ailerons mixing into the throttle, and now
also the rudder from Mix 6. At the same time, Mix 6
is mixing the throttle into the rudder only. Since the
Include Mixing is always active, you are also mixing
your ailerons into the rudder. This results in the
aileron stick moving not only the aileron servo but
also the throttle and rudder servos.
Include Mixing may sound complex, but it
actually eliminates the need for a third mixing
program to mix the aileron and rudder channels.
Therefore, Include Mixing reduces the number of
mixing programs needed when using multiple
mixing functions.
Mixing Operation and Switches
As mentioned previously, each mixing program can
be turned on and off by a lever or switch. The levers
and switches that can be selected for program
mixing are tabulated at the right with their
abbreviations appearing on the display and their
corresponding positions.
The mix switch options for Mixes #1, 4, and 5are:
ON:
Always On
MIX:
Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix Switch
FLP-D: Activated in the Down position of the Flap
Mix switch
FLP-U: Activated in the Up position of the Flap
Mix switch
The Mix switch options for Mixes # 2, 3, and 6 are:
ON:
Always On
MIX:
Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch
BTFYO: Activated in the Forward position of the
Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)
BTFY1: Activated in the Rearward position of the
Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)
For example,
Mix 5:
AILE - THRO
Mix 6:
THRO - RUDD
170
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 171
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.16
FAIL-SAFE/HOLD FUNCTION (PCM ONLY)
The Fail-Safe/Hold function is available only when
you use the X-378 transmitter in either of the PCM
modulations-S-PCM or Z-PCM. This function is
designed to help minimize damage to your aircraft
during a loss of signal to the receiver. The servos
either assume the fail-safe presets or hold their last
good signal position.
Note: In the PCM modulations, the FailSafe/Hold function cannot be totally disabled
so that the servos will react to interference in
the same way as they do in a PPM (FM)
system. This is only possible with the use of a
PPM receiver and the transmitter in the
PPM modulation. Since the actual screen
appearance varies depending on the
modulation of your radio, refer to the
appropriate modulation section that follows.
If you are in the PPM modulation, the FailSafe/Hold function is not applicable.
Therefore, the Fail-Safe/Hold function will not
appear on your LCD screen menu while in the
PPM mode. Refer to the Modulation Selection
section for more information pertaining to the
broadcast signal of your X-378 transmitter.
Accessing the Fail Safe/Hold Function in Z PCM Modulation
Hold (Z-PCM)
The Hold Function is automatically activated when
the radio is turned on and is in the Z-PCM
modulation. This function stops (or holds) the servos
in the positions they were in just prior to the
UP
Trainer Function
Programmable Mix 6
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
DN
interference. Therefore, your aircraft maintains the
position held immediately before the interference
was experienced. When a clear signal is restored, the
Hold function releases, and control of the airplane
returns to you.
CH
Press the (+) or (-) keys to select
the desired hold delay time.
CLR
Move the control
sticks to the desired
Hold position, then
press Clear to store
these positions.
171
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 172
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the PCM Hold Function (Z-PCM)
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
access the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “FAIL-S”
(fail-safe) appears in the upper left portion of the LCD.
When the Fail-Safe function is activated (i.e., when
the signal is interrupted), the transmitter
automatically moves each servo to a preset position.
The position that each servo assumes is determined
by you, as is the time length of interference that
must occur before servo movement.
Note: If “Fail-Safe” does not appear on your
LCD, it is because you are transmitting in
PPM. Fail-Safe is not applicable in the PPM
mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode
Selection section for more information.You
should never attempt to adjust the Fail-Safe
function when the aircraft is running.
After the interference has ceased, control of the
aircraft returns immediately to you. There are three
time delays to choose from: 0.25 second, 0.5 second
and 1.0 second. These time delays are the amount of
time it takes, starting the moment the interference
occurs, until the servos assume their preset
positions.
Setting the Fail-Safe/Hold Memory in Z-PCM Modulation
1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, it is time to
adjust the Fail-Safe presets.
2. Select among the three time delays (.25, .50 or 1.0
second). Press the (+) or (-) key until the appropriate
delay appears on the screen.
3. Hold the transmitter sticks in the positions that
you want the servos to assume during signal loss
conditions. You can determine fail-safe preset
positions for the other channels by placing the other
channel switches in the positions that you want
them to assume during interference.
4. With the sticks and switches in the desired failsafe positions, touch the Clear key. This will enter
these locations as the fail-safe memory settings. A
single high-pitched beep will be heard when the Clear
key is pressed indicating that the positions have
been memorized.
5. To confirm that the input of data was successful,
switch the transmitter off. The controls will move to
the input locations. If not, repeat step 4 again.
172
Note: These preset positions remain stored
in the transmitter’s memory until both the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium
backup battery have been removed (or until
data reset has been performed). Therefore,
you do not have to reset the fail-safe each
time you fly. Should you want to re-adjust
the fail-safe presets, access the Fail-Safe
function and adjust the presets as you have
just done. The transmitter automatically
recalls the settings for the last Fail-Safe
adjustment.
6. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press
the Down key.
7. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.
8. To exit the fail-safe function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 173
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in S-PCM Modulation
Hold (S-PCM) The S-PCM Hold function is
automatically activated when the radio is turned on
and is in the S-PCM modulation. This function stops
(or holds) the servos in the positions they were in just
prior to the interference. Therefore, your aircraft
maintains the position held immediately before the
interference was experienced. When a clear signal is
restored, the Hold function releases, and control of
the aircraft returns to you.
Fail-Safe channel to be programmed.
DN
UP
Trainer Function
Programmable Mix 6
CH
CLR
Press the (+) or (-) keys to
select Hold (HO) or Fail-Safe
(F.S.) modes for each channel.
Press the Clear key to store the
fail-safe servo positions for all
channels set to F.S.
Press Channel to select the desired
channel to be programmed.
1. Place the transmitter power switch in the
On position.
2. While the power switch is in the On position, press
the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to access
the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “FAIL-S”
(fail-safe) appears in the upper left portion of the LCD.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Note: If “Fail-Safe” does not appear on your
LCD, it is because you are transmitting in
PPM. Fail-Safe is not applicable in the PPM
mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode
Selection Section for more information.
173
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 174
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Fail Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modulation
The X-378 allows you to combine the Hold and FailSafe presets for all seven channels on the receiver you can select fail-safe or hold independently for all
channels on your aircraft. In other words, some
channels will hold their last clear signal position
(Hold), while others assume the preset position
(Fail-Safe). Once the fail-safe has been activated by
signal interruption (interference), the transmitter
automatically moves the servos to a preset position.
The predetermined servo positions are set by you. In
the S-PCM Fail-Safe, the time delay (the amount of
time it takes, starting the moment the interference
occurs, until the servos assume the preset positions)
is fixed at .25 seconds. After the interference has
ceased, normal operation of the aircraft returns to
you immediately.
Setting the Fail Safe/Hold Memory in S-PCM Modulation
1. First, select all of the channels for which you want
to enter a fail-safe preset. To do so, use the Channel
key until the appropriate channel name appears in
the upper right portion of the LCD. We will use the
aileron (AILE) for our example. The display will
appear as shown above.
2. Press either the (+) or (-) key. This will change
the display from Hold (HO) to the Fail-Safe (F.S.)
preset display.
3. Repeat steps #1 and #2 for all channels desired to
be set to the Fail-Safe (F.S.) position.
4. Hold all of the appropriate transmitter control
sticks and switches in the desired positions and
press the Clear key. This will enter the location as the
fail-safe memory setting for all channels selected to
F.S. When the Clear key is pressed, a single high-pitch
beep will be heard indicating that the Fail-Safe
positions have been stored.
5. Hold the aileron stick to the right and press the
Clear key.
6. To confirm that the input of data was successful to
the applicable channels, switch the transmitter off.
174
All channels selected to Fail-Safe (F.S.) should to
their selected positions.
Note: These preset positions remain stored
in the transmitter’s memory until both the
transmitter battery pack and the lithium
backup battery have been removed (or until
the Data Reset function has been utilized).
Therefore, you do not have to reset the FailSafe each time you fly. Should you want to
re-adjust the fail-safe preset position, access
the Fail-Safe function once again and adjust
the presets as you have just done. The
transmitter automatically recalls the settings
for the latest fail-safe adjustment.
7. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press
the Down key.
8. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Fail-Safe/Hold function, press the Up
and Down keys simultaneously..
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 175
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.17
TRAINER SYSTEM
The X-378 transmitter employs two separate types of
trainer systems:
1) Normal Trainer System
All functions are controlled by either the master
transmitter (MAST) or the slave transmitter (SLAVE)
2) Programmable Function Trainer
Individual channel functions may be assigned to the
slave one at a time. Since the control functions can be
transferred one by one, students can concentrate on
only one function at a time until they are competent
to fly solo with all controls.
Trainer function type selected (N
for Normal, P for Programmable)
Current trainer mode
(Master or Slave)
Timer Function
Fail-Safe Function (PCM
Modulation is selected)
Press the (+) or (-) keys
to change the settings of
each channel.
Press Clear to reset to
the factory default
settings (Normal).
Press Channel to select
the desired channel to
be programmed.
Accessing the Programmable Trainer Function
1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press the Up or Down keys until “MAST” appears on
the center portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key to select the channel to be
adjusted. The channel name will be displayed just to
the right of “MAST.”
5. Once the channel appears that you want to make a
slave, press the (+) or (-) key. This will change the
display from “MAST” to “SLAVE.” The “N” at the upper
right portion of the LCD will also change to P. If you
want to make more slave channels, press the Channel
key until the next desired channel is shown and press
the (+) or (-) key to change the settings..
Channel to be adjusted
Channel has been set to
programmable Trainer mode
6. To change the Programmable Trainer function back
to the Normal Trainer system, press the Clear key.
7. To access the fail-safe function, press the Down key.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
8. To access the Timer function, press the Up key.
9. To exit the Trainer function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
175
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 176
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Basic Corrections and Conditions for Training
1. The slave transmitter must be PPM (Pulse Position
Modulation) and must be equipped with a DSC
(Direct Servo Control) or trainer jack. If the slave
transmitter is PPM/PCM selectable, select PPM. The
master transmitter can be PCM or PPM.
2. Plug the trainer cord (optional part #JRPA130) into
each transmitter’s DSC/Trainer jack.
3. Switch the master transmitter on. Do not switch on
the slave transmitter; it is only necessary to have the
master transmitter on.
Note: If the master transmitter is the X-378,
the LCD will indicate “TRINR” (Trainer Master)
and will list the channels that have been
programmed when the power switch is on.
Note: Each transmitter will appear to be on,
but neither is actually transmitting at this time.
4. Pull the trainer switch toward you to transfer
control to the slave. Releasing the switch
automatically reverts to the master transmitter.
5. Be sure the slave transmitter’s servo reversing, dual
rates, end-point adjustment and trims are identical to
the master transmitter. This can be checked by pulling
the trainer switch toward you. If the control surfaces
move, adjust the slave transmitter until the trainer
switch can be activated without a change of the
control surface position.
Use of the Normal Trainer System
In this mode, all functions are switched from the
master to the slave using the trainer switch. This is
176
the Normal mode-no function setup is necessary to
activate this system.
Use of the Programmable Trainer Function
In this mode, the master may assign functions to the
student one at a time to make learning to fly easier.
For example, the master may assign the slave aileron
and elevator. Then, when the trainer switch is
activated (pulled forward), the slave has control of
aileron and elevator only while the master retains
control of throttle and rudder.
Note: When all channels are set to master,
the Trainer System becomes normal.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 177
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
6.18
TIMER FUNCTION
The X-378 offers two separate types of timer
functions: Countown and Stopwatch. The Countdown timer time is input in 10-second intervals up to
35 minutes. The timer can be set for each individual
model and retained in the memory for each model.
Once the Timer function has been activated, it can be
started and stopped from the normal display screen
using the Channel key. It can also be started and
stopped using the snap roll/trainer button located
at the front right portion of the transmitter. When the
X-378 is being used as the master transmitter in the
Training function, the trainer switch will not operate
the timer start/stop function, and the timer function
cannot be used.
Note: In the Countdown mode, the
transmitter will beep three times at
30 seconds, two times at 20 seconds, and
beep one time every second from 10 to 0. At
zero there will be a continuous tone for 1
second and then the timer will begin counting
up with a + indication to the left of the time
value. When used as the Stopwatch, the timer
will count up to 44 minutes, 59 seconds, at
which time it will reset to zero and continue
to count.
Timer Option Selected
Timer Value Set
Servo Reversing
Trainer Function
Press the (+) or = keys to
increase or decrease the
time value.
Press Clear to reset the down
timer value to the factory
default position (10:00).
Press Channel to select timer
options (Off, Down-Timer,
Stop Watch).
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
177
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 178
CHAPTER 6: FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane
Accessing the Timer Functions
Accessing the Timer Functions
1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.
2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to
enter the Function mode.
3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TIMER” is
displayed in the left portion of the LCD.
4. Press the Channel key to select the desired timer
option (Off, Down-Timer, Stop Watch)
Setting the Down-Timer Value
5. Pressing the (+) key will change the display to :10
each time the (+) is pressed, and the value will
increase in 10-second intervals up to 59:50 minutes.
Pressing the Clear key will reset the Countdown Timer
to the factory default 10:00 minute value.
When the Down Timer function is selected, the
normal display screen will appear as shown below:
Timer Value Selected
To access the Servo Reversing
function, press the Up key.
To access the Trainer function,
press the Down key.
Press the Channel key (or the
Snap Roll/Trainer/Timer button)
to start/stop the timer.
Press the Clear key to
reset to the assigned
timer value.
To exit the Timer function, press the Down and
Channel keys simultaneously.
178
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 179
CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane
7.1
X-378 PROGRAM AND MIX APPLICATIONS
This section will outline the procedures and
suggested basic mechanical set-up for gliders using a
six-servo flight system with each flap and aileron
driven by a dedicated servo. The following will be
outlined:
A. Basic Mechanical Setup and Mixing (Aileron
Differential and Coupled Aileron-Rudder)
B. Presets (Launch and Reflex)
C. Landing Mode Programming
D. Full Span Variable Camber Mixing
E. Special Mixes-TE Droop with Elevator up, Reflex
with Elevator down and Snap Flaps.
Note: If you are using a 5-servo installation with
a single flap servo, all procedures will be similar.
Servo Installation
In preparing your glider wings for servo installation
some advance planning will make the setup and
programming of the X-378 much easier. The following
basic ground rules will speed this process:
1. It is necessary that all wing-mounted servos be
installed with the output shaft facing outward toward
the wing tips.
2. Before you begin programming it is important to
set up the transmitter for multi-function sailplane
use. To do this:
A.) Turn the transmitter On while you simultaneously
hold the Down and Channel keys to enter the Function
mode. Using the Up key, move to V.TAIL mix. Use the
Channel key to move to DUAL (Dual-Flap Mix) and use
the (+) key to activate the Dual-Flap function if you
are using two flap servos.
B.) With the Up key, move the display to “LEVRS
FLAP” and press the (+) key to change the display
to “FL+LS.”
C.) Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously
twice to move to the Function mode. Use the Up key
to move through the functions to the display that
reads “TRIM FLAP,” L6 (Channel 6). Next, use the (+)
key to change the L5 display from “ON” to “OFF.” Press
the Channel key and repeat for L5 (Channel 5). This
deactivates the channel 5 gear switch, as well as the
channel 6 flap lever to eliminate any inadvertent
changes to the flap and aileron position.
3. Use the Up key to move the display to “REV.” (Servo
reversing). Check movement of all servos and adjust
servo direction for all surfaces.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4. Use the Up key again to move to the SUB-TRIM
function. With the Channel key, move to FLAP and AUX 2
and adjust in the direction that moves the servo arms
so that they raise the flaps. (Suggested values: FLAP
UP-90; AUX 2-90)
5. With all trims in neutral, the aileron servo arms
should angle forward 20-30 degrees (see illustration
at right). This allows for more up throw mechanically.
The flap servo arms should be angled slightly to the
rear or vertical (see illustration at right). These setups
should be the same on each wing as symmetry here
helps in programming the landing mode and camber
(which will be explained later).
6. In setting up the aileron differential, it is best to
use the end-point adjustment in the TRAVL (Travel
Adjust) program. 3 or 4:1 differential is generally used
on most aileron-equipped gliders. Many pilots will
program as much up-aileron as possible and 1/8” to
1/4” down-aileron as a starting point.
7. The X-378 has the aileron/rudder coupling mix
preprogrammed in the Function mode menu. No
values are set in this program. Use the Up key to move
through the Function Setting modes to AILE-RUDD
mix. Use the Channel key to move to the mix switch
assignment for the Aileron- to-Rudder Mix. If you
want aileron/rudder coupling at all times, use the (+)
key to move the display to “ON”. To turn this mix off
for aerobatics etc., move the display to MIX. This will
allow you to use the mix switch located at the right,
top-rear of the transmitter to turn the aileron/rudder
coupling on and off.
179
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:09 PM
Page 180
CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane
Servo Installation (continued)
8. To set the amount of coupling, use the Channel
key to move the display back to the “AILE-RUDD”
screen. Hold the aileron stick to one direction and,
with the (+) or (-) key, adjust the value on the display
to the desired amount of rudder movement in the
proper direction.
Servo Arm Angle
Flap Servo Arm
In the initial setup of your X-378 transmitter
(System mode), if you set the flap control preference
to FL+LS (Flap Mix switch + Flap Lever for Trim), the
setup of your Launch (and Reflex) presets is partially
done for you.
Launch Preset
1. Pull the preset switch down to the launch preset
position. This will drop the flaps down further than
ideal for most launch situations. Move to the TRAVL
(Travel adjustment) portion of your Function mode
settings, and with the Channel key, move to the flap
channel. Reduce the value shown on the display until
you get the amount of flap throw desired for launch.
You need only adjust the flap channel (Aux 1) as the
AUX 2 channel should follow automatically in DualFlap mode. This change in value should not affect the
flap throw in Crow or Camber mode either.
2. Aileron/camber (Crow) should automatically be
mixed into this launch preset if you have chosen the
FLP-D switch for the flap/aileron mix. You may have to
fine tune the aileron down throws.
3. If you wish to add some elevator up-trim to your
launch preset, use the Up key to move to FLAP-ELEV
180
mix. Use the Channel key to move to the switch
selection function, and then press the (+) or (-) keys
to select F-U/D. Press the Channel key twice to move to
the mix value display and add the desired amount of
up elevator for launch preset. Leave the offset for this
mix at 0.
4. To add a high rate aileron/rudder mix to the launch
preset, use the Up key and move to AILE-RUDD Mix.
Next, use the Channel key to move the display to the
switch selection screen (SW). Use the Up key to
select FLP-D. Move the flap switch to the down
position, and press the Channel key once to move to
the mix value display. The value will have to be set for
both left and right movement of the aileron stick. Set
the value at (+)30% to start. Leave the offset for this
mix at 0.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 181
CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane
Trailing Edge Reflex Preset
The preset for Trailing Edge Reflex does not require
the use of the programmable mixes in the X-378 if
you are using the FL+LS function for your flaps
(System Mode).
1. Position the flap switch in the reflex (up) position.
This will make the flaps raise. Move to the TRAVL
(Travel adjustment) portion of the Function Settings
mode and adjust the flap up travel to the desired
amount of reflex.
2. To set the ailerons for reflex, use the Up key to
move to the FLAP-AILE mix display. Use the Channel
key to move to switch select and set to F-U/D. Move
to mix value with the Channel key and adjust the value
to raise ailerons to match flaps. You may have to fine
tune by adjusting the aileron travel through the Travel
Adjust (endpoint adjustment) function to achieve a
straight line along the entire trailing edge.
3. If you wish to automatically adjust elevator trim in
the reflex preset, press the Down key to move to the
FLAP-ELEV mix. Make sure the switch select for this
mix is also F-U/D and adjust the elevator trim to the
desired amount. (Generally, a slight amount of down
is used for better penetration or increased speed).
Leave the offset for this mix at 0.
4. To automatically adjust your aileron/rudder mix
with the reflex preset (in many cases you may reduce
the amount of mix), use the Up key to move to AILERUDD mix . Press the Channel key to move the display
to the mix switch selection. Use the Up key to select
FLP-U. Move the flap switch to the up position. Use
the Channel key to move to the mix value display. The
value will have to be set for both left and right
movement of the aileron stick and will be a negative
value. Set the mix value for each direction at -10% to
start. Leave the offset for this mix at 0.
Snap Flaps
Snap Flaps is a function that mixes a given amount of
down flaps when a specified up elevator is given. This
aids in tight turns and can be handy when circling in
tight thermals or for changing directions quickly.
Select an unused programmable mix and mix the
elevator channel (ELEV) to the flap channel (FLAP).
Pull the elevator stick back to about 75% of its travel
and store an offset in this position.
Now pull the elevator stick full back and store a mix
value to droop the flaps to the position you desire.
Choose the switch position you want to turn off/on
the mix. Many pilots choose to leave this function
on at all times. Programmable mix 1 or 2 works well
for this.
For gliders using flaps for glide path control, the
following information will allow you to program the
X-378 for precise spot landings and safe descent from
high altitude. All of the options and mix requirements
for glide path control using flaps are incorporated
into one portion of the software. For both landings
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
and variable trailing edge crow (camber), you will use
SPOI-ELEV, which is part of the Function mode. There
are actually two modes (or setups) available. These
are determined by the position of what is called the
crow/camber (GEAR) mix switch (more properly the
landing/camber switch), which is located at the left,
top corner of the transmitter. Landing position for
this switch will be toward the rear of the transmitter
(POS.1 in your display). Using the SPOI-ELEV will
allow you to operate your flaps with crow (ailerons
rising up as spoilerons, if you want), with automatic
electronic elevator compensation all from the left
stick (Mode II).
This function can operate at neutral flap with the left
stick either up or down. However, the trim operates
only with the stick at the bottom position. So, if you
want to use the trim tab, neutral flap should be with
the left stick down. The digital trim lever should stay
in the center (neutral) position. The X-378’s Digital
Trim has a very noticeable audible beep at center that
is very easy to locate while flying.
181
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 182
CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane
Snap Flaps (continued)
1. In the Function mode, use the Up key until the
display reads “SPOI-ELEV.” Now press the Channel key
until “OFFSET” is displayed in the center of the LCD.
With the trim tab centered and the left stick in
position for neutral flap, press the Clear key to the
right of the data keys. This stores your offset or
neutral point.
2. Use the Channel key and go to SPOI-FLAP. Using the
(+) or (-) keys, program the mix value to give 90
degrees of flap throw. It may be necessary to return to
the TRAVL (travel adjustment) to fine tune the flap
throws and keep both surfaces even as they are
lowered.
3. Use the Channel key to move to SPOI-ELEV where
you can now set your elevator compensation. The
value may vary depending on the size and type of
elevator used. A starting point for all flying stabilators
will be approximately 35% down; a fixed stabilizer
with elevator will generally use a smaller percentage.
4. If you want to add crow (spoilerons), use the
Channel key to move to SPOI-AILE. With the (+) or (-)
keys, set the mix value for the desired amount of up
aileron (crow). This is an option that not all pilots will
use, but it can be a very effective tool in helping to
slow down for landing. Depending on the design of
glider you are flying, anywhere from 5-45 degrees of
crow (camber) can be useful. This basic setup will
provide you with an effective landing mode for almost
all conditions. The given values are only guidelines,
and you will need to experiment and adjust them to
your individual needs and style.
The Full Span/Variable Crow/Camber function also
uses the SPOI- portion of the Function mode. The
purpose of this function is to allow the varying of the
crow (camber) or position of the trailing edge of your
wings’ airfoil while flying, combined with the ability to
182
adjust to variable flying conditions. To use this
function, place the crow/camber (GEAR) switch in the
forward (0) position.
1. Use the Channel key to move the display to “SPOIFLAP,” switch position 0.
2. With the left stick moved to the full throw (down
flap) position, adjust the mix value for approximately
1/4” to 3/8” down flap.
2. Leave the left stick in that position and use the
Channel key to move to SPOI-AILE, switch position 0.
Use the (+) or (-) keys to move the ailerons down the
same amount as the flaps. You may have to fine tune
each aileron in the Travel Adjustment function
(TRAVL) to get a straight line along the trailing edge.
3. If you want to change elevator trim as you add crow
(camber), you can assign a value in SPOI-ELEV, switch
position 0 for this purpose.
4. If you have set the camber and the landing modes
at neutral with the left stick in the lower position
where the trim tab will function, the trailing edge will
reflex (move up) 2-3 degrees (in camber mode only)
when the trim tab is moved down. For most modern
glider airfoils, this is adequate for increased speed or
penetration in wind.
The open programmable mixes available in the X-378
allow you to enhance your presets with a variety of
mix applications. Another programming feature
included in the X-378 is the ability to assign a switch
to use for the following mixes: All programmable
mixes, Elevator-Flapperons, Aileron-Flapperons,
Flapperons-Elevator, and Flapperons-Aileron. In
addition, the latter two mixes also include a trim
offset for the flap.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 183
CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane
Flapperons
Following are guidelines for mixing flaps to follow
aileron movement. This mix will work as part of
the Launch and/or reflex presets at your option. The
X-378 transmitter must have the Dual-Flaps activated
in the Function mode to access the aileron/flap mix.
Aileron/Flap Mix
1. In the Function mode, use the Up key to move to
the AILE-FLAP function. Now with the Channel key,
move to the switch select to select your switch option.
2. Move to mix value with the Channel key and enter
the value for throw. There is no separate mix value for
each direction. There is no offset used with this mix.
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
Elevator/Flap Mix
The Elevator/Flap Mix is another optional mix that
can be used as an option with either preset or other
switch options. Different mix values are programmed
for up and down elevator throw. This mix is generally
used with slope aerobatics, or for multi-task speed
and distance tasks.
1. From the aileron/flap mix, use the Down key to
move to ELEV-FLAP function. Now press the Channel
key to move to switch select. In many multi-task
applications this mix will be used with reflex (FLP-U).
2. Press the Channel key to move back to mix value and
enter for desired direction and throw. The most
common is to drop the wing trailing edge with up elevator.
183
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 184
CHAPTER 8 : DATA SHEET • Sailplane
184
X-378 MANUAL Sailplane
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 185
SECTION V: IMPORTANT INFORMATION
SERVO PRECAUTIONS
• Do not lubricate servo gears or motors.
• Do not overload retract servos during retracted
or extended conditions. Make sure they are
allowed to travel their full deflection.
Overloading or stalling the retract servo can
cause excessive current drain.
• Make sure that all servos move freely through
their rotations and that no linkages hang up or
bind. A binding control linkage can cause a
servo to draw excessive current. A stalled servo
can drain a battery pack in a matter of minutes.
• Correct any control surface "buzz" or "flutter" as
soon as it is noticed in flight, as this condition
can destroy the feedback potentiometer in the
servo. It may be extremely dangerous to ignore
such "buzz" or "flutter."
• Use the supplied rubber grommets and brass
servo eyelets when mounting your servos. Do
not over-tighten the servo mounting screws, as
this negates the dampening effect of the
rubber grommets.
• Ensure that the servo horn is securely fastened
to the servo. Use only the JR servo arm screws
provided; the thread size is different from that
used by other manufacturers.
• Do not continue to use the servo arms when
they become "yellowed" or discolored. Such
servo arms may be brittle and can snap at any
time, possibly causing the aircraft to crash.
• Check all related mounting screws and linkages
frequently. Aircraft often vibrate, causing linkages
and screws to loosen.
GENERAL NOTES
Radio controlled models are a great source of
pleasure. Unfortunately, they can also pose a
potential hazard if not maintained and operated
properly. It is imperative that you install your radio
control system correctly. Additionally, your level of
piloting competency must be high enough to
ensure that you are able to control your aircraft
under all conditions. If you are a newcomer to radio
controlled flying, please seek help from an
experienced pilot or your local hobby shop.
Safety Do's and Don'ts for Pilots
• Ensure that your batteries have been properly
charged prior to initial flight.
• Keep track of the time that the system is turned
on so that you will have an idea of how long you
can safely operate your system.
• Perform a ground range check prior to the initial
flight of the day. See the "Daily Flight Checks
Section" for information on how to do so.
• Check all control surfaces prior to each takeoff.
• Use frequency flags.
• Do not fly your model near spectators, parking
areas or at any other area that could result in
injury to people or damage of property.
X-378 MANUAL
• Do not fly during adverse weather conditions.
Poor visibility can cause disorientation and loss
of control of your aircraft. Strong winds can
cause similar problems.
• Do not fly unless your frequency is clear.
Warning: Only one transmitter at a time can
operate on a given frequency. If you turn on
your transmitter while someone else is
operating a model on your frequency, both
pilots will lose control of their models. Only
one person can use a given frequency at a
time. It does not matter if it is AM, FM or
PCM—only one frequency at a time.
• Do not point the transmitter antenna directly
toward the model. The radiation pattern from
the tip of the antenna is inherently low.
• Do not take chances. If at any time during flight
you observe any erratic or abnormal operation,
land immediately and do not resume flight until
the cause of the problem has been ascertained
and corrected. Safety can never be taken lightly.
185
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 186
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
1. Purpose
This advisory outlines safety standards for
operations of model aircraft. We encourage
voluntary compliance with these standards.
2. Background
Attention has been drawn to the increase in model
aircraft operation. There is a need for added caution
when operating free flight and radio controlled craft
in order to avoid creating a noise nuisance or a
potential hazard to full-scale aircraft and persons
and/or property on the surface.
3. Operating Standards
Modelers generally are concerned with safety and
exercise good judgment when flying model aircraft.
However, in the interest of safer skies, we encourage
operators of radio controlled and free flight models
to comply with the following standards:
a. Exercise vigilance in locating full-scale aircraft
(get help if possible) so as not to create a collision
hazard.
c. Do not fly higher than 400 feet above the
surface.
d. Always operate more than three miles from the
boundary of an airport unless you are given
permission to be closer by the appropriate air
traffic control facility in the case of an airport for
which a control zone has been designated or by
the airport manager in the case of other airports.
e. Do not hesitate to ask for assistance in
complying with these guidelines at the airport
traffic control tower or air route traffic control
center nearest the site of your proposed
operation.
Information Provided By:
Director, Air Traffic Service Federal Aviation
Administration, Washington, D.C.
DAILY FLIGHT CHECKS
1. Check the battery voltage on both the transmitter
and the receiver battery packs. Do not fly below 9.0V
on the transmitter or below 4.7V on the receiver. To
do so can crash your aircraft.
Note: When you check these batteries,
ensure that you have the polarities correct
on your expanded scale voltmeter.
2. Check all hardware (linkages, screws, nuts, and
bolts) prior to each day's flight. Be sure that binding
does not occur and that all parts are is properly
secured.
3. Ensure that all surfaces are moving in the proper
manner.
186
b. Select an operating site at sufficient distance
from populated areas so you do not create a
noise problem or a potential hazard.
4. Perform a ground range check before each day's
flying session. The range check should be as follows:
• Do not extend the transmitter antenna at this
time. Turn the transmitter "on."
• Turn the model "on."
• Slowly walk away from the model while moving
the control surfaces. The aircraft should function
properly at a distance of 60-75 feet.
5. Prior to starting your aircraft, turn off your
transmitter, then turn it back on. Do this each time
you start your aircraft. If any critical switches are on
without your knowledge, the transmitter alarm will
warn you at this time.
6. Check that all trim levers are in the proper location.
7. All servo pigtails and switch harness plugs should
be secured in the receiver. Make sure that the switch
harness moves freely in both directions.
X-378 MANUAL
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 187
FREQUENCY CHART
72 MHz requires no special license to operate.
Low Band 72 MHz
High Band 72 MHz
Ch.No.
Frequency
Ch.No.
Frequency
11
72.010
36
72.510
12
72.030
37
72.530
13
72.050
38
72.550
14
72.070
39
72.570
15
72.090
40
72.590
16
72.110
41
72.610
17
72.130
42
72.630
18
72.150
43
72.650
19
72.170
44
72.670
20
72.190
45
72.690
21
72.210
46
72.710
22
72.230
47
72.730
23
72.250
48
72.750
24
72.270
49
72.770
25
72.290
50
72.790
26
72.310
51
72.810
27
72.330
52
72.830
28
72.350
53
72.850
29
72.370
54
72.870
30
72.390
55
72.890
31
72.410
56
72.910
32
72.430
57
72.930
33
72.450
58
72.950
34
72.470
59
72.970
35
72.490
60
72.990
Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice:
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
requires that changes in transmitter frequency must
be performed only by an authorized service
technician (Horizon Service Center).
X-378 MANUAL
Any transmitter frequency changes made by a
non-certified technician may result in a violation
of FCC rules.
Channels 12–14 are not available through JR.
187
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 188
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Important: Be sure to keep your original
dated sales receipt, as you will be required
to provide proof-of -purchase date for the
equipment to be serviced under warranty.
Warranty Coverage
Your new JR Remote Control Radio System is
warranted to the original purchaser against
manufacturer defects in material and workmanship
for an unprecedented 3 years from the date of
purchase. During this period, Horizon Service
Center will repair or replace, at our discretion, any
component that is found to be factory defective at
no cost to the purchaser. This warranty is limited to
the original purchaser of the unit and is not
transferable.
This warranty does not apply to any unit that has
been improperly installed, mishandled, abused or
damaged in a crash, or to any unit that has been
repaired or altered by any unauthorized agencies.
Under no circumstances will the buyer be entitled
to consequential or incidental damages. This
limited warranty gives you specific legal rights; you
also have other rights, which may vary from state to
state. As with all fine electronic equipment, do not
subject your radio system to extreme temperatures,
humidity or moisture. Do not leave it in direct
sunlight for long periods of time.
Repair Service Directions
In the event that your JR radio needs service, please
follow the instructions listed below.
1. Check all on/off switches to be sure they are off.
This will speed the repair process of checking
battery condition.
2. Return your system components only (transmitter,
receiver, servos, etc.). Do not return your system
installed in a model aircraft, car, boat, etc.
3. Preferably, use the original carton/packaging
(molded foam container), or equivalent, to ship
188
your system. Do not use the system carton itself as
a shipping carton, you should package the system
carton within a sturdy shipping container using
additional packing material to safeguard against
damage during transit. Include complete name and
address information inside the carton, as well as
clearly writing it on the outer label/return address
area.
4. Include detailed information explaining your
operation of the system and problem(s)
encountered. Provide an itemized list of equipment
enclosed and identify any particular area/function,
which may better assist our technicians in
addressing your concerns. Within your letter, advise
us of the payment method you prefer to use.
Horizon Service Center accepts VISA or MasterCard.
Please include your card number and expiration
date. Date your correspondence, and be sure your
complete name and address appear on this
enclosure.
5. Include your name, mailing address, and a phone
number where you can be reached during the
business day.
Warranty Repairs
To receive warranty service, you must include a copy
of your original dated sales receipt to verify your
proof-of-purchase date. Providing that warranty
conditions have been met, your radio will be
repaired without charge.
Normal Non-Warranty Repairs
Should your repair cost exceed 50% of the retail
purchase cost, you will be provided with an
estimate advising you of your options.
Mail your system to:
Horizon Service Center
4105 Fieldstone Road
Champaign, IL 61822
Phone: (217) 355-9511
X-378 MANUAL
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 189
Notes:
X-378 MANUAL
189
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 190
Notes:
190
X-378 MANUAL
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 191
Notes:
X-378 MANUAL
191
4682 JR X-378 • ALL
7/23/02
10:10 PM
Page 192
Horizon Hobby Inc.,
4105 Fieldstone Road
Champaign, IL 61822
www.horizonhobby.com
Phone: (217) 355-9511
192
X-378 MANUAL

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.2
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2002:07:23 22:12:22
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Macintosh
Modify Date                     : 2002:07:23 22:12:26-05:00
Page Count                      : 192

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools